JP7368768B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent years, pachinko gaming machines have drawn a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board surface (playing area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a jackpot (special game ) state, and pachinko gaming machines are mainstream, where a large prize opening provided on the game board opens and a large amount of prize balls can be won. The pachinko gaming machine configured in this manner includes a probability-changing gaming state that increases the probability of winning in the jackpot drawing, and a time-saving gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot drawing. There are also gaming machines that increase the interest of the game by creating game progress states that are advantageous to the player based on these game states.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2000-225255 Patent No. 5297594 Patent No. 5536601 Patent No. 5572745

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem in that it is desired to develop a model that can realize even more innovative gaming features.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
A variable prize opening that can be in a closed state or an open state,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
It has at least a fluctuation pattern table A as a table referred to when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information, and a fluctuation pattern table B in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different from the fluctuation pattern table A, It has at least a fluctuation state A that refers to the fluctuation pattern table A and a fluctuation state B that references the fluctuation pattern table B, and the fluctuation state B is a fluctuation state that is transferred from the fluctuation state A,
Fluctuation state A is a time saving state in which the fluctuating display time of identification information is relatively shorter than fluctuating state B, and fluctuating state B is a time saving state in which the fluctuating display time of identification information is relatively longer than fluctuating state A. It is a non-time saving state that becomes time,
It is possible to execute a right-handed instruction performance as a performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the gaming area,
The right-handed instruction performance is configured not to be executed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state ,
This is a performance that can be executed in a time-saving state, and is a performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the gaming area. have,
In the time saving state, the first right-handed hitting instruction performance and the second right-handed hitting instruction performance are configured to be executable at the same time,
In the time saving state, the first right-handed instruction performance is configured to start execution when a predetermined condition is satisfied and to end after a specific period of time, while the second right-handed instruction performance is It is configured to be executable while the right-handed hitting instruction performance is being executed and also to be executable while the first right-handed hitting instruction performance is not being executed,
It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed instruction performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the game area even while a special game is being executed. The execution mode of a right-handed instruction performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the game ball is configured to change during execution of a special game ,
In the time saving state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and a predetermined period, which is shorter than the specific period, has elapsed since the execution of the first right-handed instruction performance has elapsed, the time saving state changes from the non-time saving state. When the special conditions for switching are satisfied, in the non-time saving state switched by satisfying the special conditions, the first right-handed instruction performance is not executed for a period obtained by subtracting the predetermined period from the specific period. ing
This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:
<Additional notes>
Note that pachinko gaming machines according to other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, but the invention is not limited to these in any way and can be implemented.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state. A variable member configured to prevent a game ball from entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or to make it difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory) B11d) and
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) into which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole (for example, the second large winning hole C20) can enter;
a first main game identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first main game identification information;
a second main game identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second main game identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the first main game identification information variable display start condition is satisfied, and the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means for controlling;
When the first main game identification information fluctuation display start condition regarding a certain first reservation is satisfied, the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game identification information display part (for example, the first main game identification information a first main game identification information display control means that controls the first main game identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the first main game symbol display section A21g) and then to stop displaying the first main game identification information;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game identification information is satisfied, so that the second suspension occurs. a second random number temporary storage means for controlling;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second main game identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second main game identification information display section (for example, the second main game identification information a second main game identification information display control means that controls the second main game identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the second main game symbol display section B21g) and then to stop displaying the second main game identification information;
a first special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A variable winning opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. a variable prize opening opening game control means for executing;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific game state that is likely to be in the open state, and is controlled so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is in the specific game state, the first main game identification The period from the start of the variable display of the information or the second main game identification information to the stop display is one unit, and from the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined final number of times. It is configured so that it does not enter the normal gaming state,
The second suspension can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Performance display content that allows sub-game identification information to be displayed on a performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG) based on information regarding the first main game identification information or second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means control means;
During the period in which the first main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) or the second main game identification information is the second main game identification information. After the sub-game identification information is variably displayed on the performance display section (for example, the performance display device SG) within the period in which it is variably displayed on the information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). and sub-game identification information display control means for controlling the pseudo-variable units to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and to be controlled to be definitively stopped and displayed after the pseudo-variable units are executed one or more times,
The sub-game identification information is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-variable unit from the time when the variable display starts until the time when the sub-game identification information stops displaying.
The probability that a pseudo variable unit will be executed when the first main game identification information is displayed in a variable manner in the normal gaming state is as follows: This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of execution is lower than that of execution.

According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, even more novel gameplay can be realized in a game machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of electric accessory drive determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of special in-game performance execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a determination process after a specific game ends on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of special in-game performance execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table related to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of right hit instruction display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a win-win look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a pre-read performance content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of performance content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of performance content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of distributed game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is an operational view of the second grand prize opening of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is an operational diagram of the electric accessory of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 66 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of small hit game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the distribution accessory control process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the V winning hole entry ball determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the V winning detection performance display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of special in-game performance execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the time-saving performance content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of electric accessory drive determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the V win detection effect display control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth modification example from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board M side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special in-game performance execution processing on the sub-control board S side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification example from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board M side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the V win detection effect display control process on the sub control board S side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification example from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 108 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of special in-game performance execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the gaming state display control process at the time of winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only entering a prize where a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" where a prize ball is not paid out. "Identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and designs. Examples include those with shapes such as . In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as main game design/special design (special design) or decorative design (design), but "special design (special design)" is the main control board This is identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and the "decorative design (design)" is identification information as a presentation displayed on the sub-control board side. "Identification information can be displayed" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emitted by a light emitting means (e.g. liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also differences in color), physical (For example, the symbols drawn on the reel strip are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). "Production" refers to display content that increases the interest of the game, such as changes and suspensions of identification information, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live-action, still images such as pictures, photographs, and characters, and still images of these. Combinations can be mentioned. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" mean, for example, in the configuration of a general big winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state in which it protrudes from the game board (on the player's side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advancing state) and a state in which it retracts into the game board (on the side opposite to the player's side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) In a configuration (so-called vero type attacker) in which the player can take the above-mentioned configuration, the advancing state = the winning state is easy, and the withdrawal state = the winning state is not easy. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (electronic computer lottery) to determine some kind of game content in pachinko gaming machines, and includes not only random numbers in a narrow sense but also pseudo-random numbers (for example, as a random number, a hard Random numbers, pseudo-random numbers (soft random numbers). For example, it determines the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically the "winning random number (random number for win/fail lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of the identification symbol. ``Fluctuating pattern determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, ``symbol determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, and ``winning pattern determining random number'' to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after the special game. be able to. Note that when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the confirmed identification information, etc., it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Furthermore, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed as a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the number of random numbers is displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, it is The random number obtained by the ball entering is called one random number (that is, in the above example, the bundle of random numbers of winning random number + fluctuation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). "Game state" refers to, for example, a special game state in which the big prize opening can be in an open state, a non-probability fluctuating game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value, and a transition to the special game state. A variable probability game state where the lottery probability is high, and an auxiliary game state where there is assistance for winning at the starting port that triggers the transition to a special game (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port) In some cases, the variable member opening period is long, the variable member opening winning probability is high, the variable member opening lottery result notification time is short, etc., or any combination of one or more of the following. "Expected average execution time of easy-to-enter ball games per unit time" is based on the assumption that the auxiliary game symbols are constantly changing (for example, there is always a hold on the auxiliary game symbols). In this case, it means the proportion of the opening period of the variable member attached to the starting port per unit time (for example, 5 minutes), but in terms of internal processing, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, , If a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function activation state/non-operation state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. The level of probability (so-called normal pattern high probability state/low probability state), the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the release of the variable member (the so-called common pattern fluctuation shortening function inactive state/activated state), This can be realized by any combination of one or more of the following. The term "average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information" is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the fluctuation display period for each fluctuation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, if the configuration is such that the variable display period is determined for each variable display of identification information, and there are multiple types of candidates for the variable display period to be determined (selected), , is the expected value based on the multiple types of variable display periods (the sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate variable display period to be selected, that one type. (In other words, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of a loss, a concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of a win, or only a fluctuation display period with the highest selection probability. In other words, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an indicator to indicate the speed of progress of the game that the player can experience (therefore, it is important to note that the concept is limited to Methods for making the average value different include varying the candidates and/or selection probabilities for the variable display period, or adding an additional variable display period even if the candidates and/or selection probabilities for the variable display period are the same. There are various methods, such as using different period values, but the method is not limited to any one method.) "A first fluctuation period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information is the first period, and a second period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period. "having at least a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, the state transitions from "first fluctuation period state" to "second fluctuation period state" to "third fluctuation period state" depending on the number of times the identification information is displayed fluctuating. Including things that can be harvested. In this case, if the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that "first fluctuation period state"<"second fluctuation period state"<"third fluctuation period state", It is possible to construct a state transition from a high-speed game progress state → a medium-speed game progress state → a slow game progress state {Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may also be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with a probability-changing gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + an easy-to-open electric chew state (despite the situation where the occurrence of the next jackpot is almost certain, the next jackpot will be obtained The longer the situation continues, the faster the game progresses, which can eliminate the feeling of fatigue when you are addicted to the game. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first fluctuation period state", the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of win is " In the "third fluctuation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state", the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of win is smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state". In addition to the fact that the difference is smaller than that in the "second fluctuation period state," the fluctuation display period of the identification information tends to be relatively long, especially when losing, compared to the "first fluctuation period state." In other words, in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information especially at the time of winning is relatively long compared to other states. Easy {In other words, the short-change loss display period in which the loss is certain and the medium-variation loss change display period that suggests a win are not selected (or are difficult to select), but the reach fluctuation (long change per hit) change display period For example, only a period is selected (or is easily selected). The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game" may be a period from immediately after the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes is made, or the period after the execution of the special game It may be a period from when one or more symbol fluctuations are made after the execution of the special game is completed until the symbol fluctuation is made a predetermined number of times (i.e., the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed. If it is within the range, it means any period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" (If a state transition is possible, the specific period may mean the period of stay in the "first variable period state" and/or the "second variable period state"). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called jackpot game) will occur when the hold is used up. The criteria for judgment are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning/failure lottery)", "fluctuation mode determining random number" for determining the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determining random number" for determining the stopping symbol, A random number such as a "winning symbol determination random number" that determines whether to move on to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after a special game may be used as a judgment standard, or the content of events derived from these random numbers (win/fail judgment results) may be used as a criterion. , the length of the fluctuation time, the type of stopped symbols, whether or not it is possible to move to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. "Suggesting or informing the existence of a reservation" means, for example, when indicating the existence of a reservation, for example, the performance during the suspension expiration (the pattern of the pattern fluctuation of the decorative pattern, or the performance performed in conjunction with it) For example, in the case of notification, the display mode of the hold indicator light (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of the hold occurrence. (In that case, changing the display color, changing the display shape, etc.), changing the sound such as the sound of the hold occurrence, BGM, etc. when the hold occurs, and a lamp for production when the hold occurs. (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects that are being executed at the time of occurrence of the hold (such as the pattern variation of decorative patterns or background effects that are performed in conjunction with it) For example, changing the The term "average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information" is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the fluctuation display period for each fluctuation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, if the configuration is such that the variable display period is determined for each variable display of identification information, and there are multiple types of candidates for the variable display period to be determined (selected), , is the expected value based on the multiple types of variable display periods (the sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate variable display period to be selected, that one type. (In other words, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, there is a concept that is limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of a loss, a concept that is limited to the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of a win (including the so-called small win), or It should be noted that the concept may be limited to only the variable display period with a high selection probability, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an indicator to indicate the speed of game progress that the player can experience (therefore, The "average value of the fluctuating display period of identification information" can be made different by varying the candidates and/or selection probabilities of the fluctuating display period, or by making the candidates and/or selection probabilities of the fluctuating display period the same. There are various methods, such as changing the period value when adding a further variable display period, but the method is not limited to any one method.) The "stay stage" is a stage that depends on controlling the performance display content displayed on the performance display device SG, and the tendency of the performance displayed when the stay stage is different {the types of preview performances that can be executed, the types of preview performances that can be executed, The types of background effects to be obtained, the frequency of execution of preview effects that can be executed, the frequency of execution of background effects that can be executed, the frequency of occurrence of ready-to-reach effects (SP reach effects, advanced effects, etc.) will be different. The "high probability promotion performance" is a production that stimulates whether or not to move to a probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and is sometimes referred to as a probability variable promotion performance. In addition, the "high probability inciting performance" may be a performance that incites whether or not to move to a probability variable gaming state (including both time-reducing gaming state and non-time-reducing gaming state) after the jackpot ends, or It may be a performance that incites whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, or it may be a performance that incites whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state after the end of a jackpot. The "specific game promotion performance" is a performance that stimulates whether or not to move to a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and is sometimes referred to as a time-saving promotion performance. In addition, the "specific game promotion performance" may be a performance that incites whether or not to move to a time-reduced gaming state (including both probability fluctuation gaming state and non-probability fluctuation gaming state) after the jackpot ends, or it may be a performance that stimulates whether or not to move to a time reduction gaming state (including both probability fluctuation gaming state and non-probability fluctuation gaming state) after the jackpot ends. It may be a performance that incites whether or not to move to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduction gaming state, or it may be an effect that incites whether or not to shift to a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state after the jackpot ends. Performances that encourage which game state to move to after the end of the jackpot, such as "inciting performance" and "specific game promoting performance", may be collectively referred to as "inciting performance." The "first notification image" is an image that urges the player to shoot the game ball at a specific shooting intensity, and is sometimes referred to as a first right-handed instruction display. The "second notification image" is an image that urges the player to shoot the game ball with a specific shooting intensity, and is sometimes referred to as a second right-hitting instruction display. In a broader sense, the "first notification image" and the "second notification image" are not limited to the images displayed on the performance display device as the "first notification effect" and the "second notification effect". The firing intensity (direction of firing) may be indicated by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing of the lamp, or the firing intensity (direction of firing) may be indicated by audio notification from the speaker (the conditions for occurrence are as follows: image and the second notification image), and furthermore, these plurality of notifications may be combined (displaying the first notification image on the effect display device and notifying ``Right hit'' by voice, etc.), and the "first notification effect" and the "second notification effect" may be set in different notification modes (the first notification effect is displayed on the effect display device, and the second notification effect is outputted as audio from the speaker. do, etc.). "Specific reservation notification performance" is a performance that suggests the possibility that there is a reservation within the reservation that will result in a high profit for the player, such as a small hit or jackpot, and is sometimes referred to as a small hit reservation notification performance. . "A performance that conceals the number of unit games" is a performance that does not definitively announce the number of rounds to be executed in a jackpot, but hints at the number of rounds to be executed during the execution of a jackpot, and a round-up performance ( This is sometimes referred to as a round-up success performance or a round-up failure performance. "A performance that encourages the firing of a game ball toward a variable member" is a performance that suggests a firing timing at which a game ball can enter a predetermined ball entrance, and is sometimes referred to as a right-handed execution instruction performance. The "variable prize opening performance" is a performance that suggests the firing timing at which a game ball can enter the big prize opening, and is sometimes referred to as a firing instruction performance. In addition, the time reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on, or may be that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction gaming state. may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, and a non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. Incidentally, the time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variable gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability varying gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

The following embodiment is a model (first type, first type multifunction machine) in which two conventional first type pachinko game machines are mixed together. However, this is not limited to this in any way, and applications to other gaming machines (for example, conventional 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and general pachinko machines) are also within the scope. . Note that this embodiment is just an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. The present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table among the various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table, or vice versa. Furthermore, in this example, the term "table" is not limited to that format, but refers to a table in which one or more selection candidates are selected from among multiple selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that this is a corresponding aspect. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modified examples {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are as follows: This is just an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, between the first main game side and the second main game side, between the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, the time reduction game and the non-probability fluctuation game). It is understood that the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown in (by condition with time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate, as long as they do not significantly deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the probability of winning at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds during the special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if this is illustrated, the size relationship may be changed as appropriate, such as the first main game side < the second main game side, or the first main game side > the second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring the probability variable gaming state to continue until the next jackpot occurs as the number of continuations, should "65535" be set as the number of continuations (configured so that it will continue substantially)? Alternatively, even in the option of an implementation method based on the same purpose, such as not setting the number of continuations and maintaining the probability fluctuating gaming state until the next jackpot occurs, as long as it does not significantly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. It should be understood that these may be modified as appropriate. In addition, the time reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on, or may be that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction gaming state. may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, and a non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated. Incidentally, the time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variable gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability varying gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. These will be explained in order below.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at the position where it is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, feeding the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Furthermore, a sub-input button SB is provided on a part of the surface of the ball tray unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball tray D20), and the presentation mode can be changed by the player's operation.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the gaming area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning holes, there are a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, an auxiliary game starting port H10, 1st big winning hole C10, 2nd big winning hole C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out port D36 is installed. Each element will be explained in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the first main game starting port. Generate ball entry information.

Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting opening B10 includes a second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s and a second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entry ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the second main game starting port B11s. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is variable between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the second main game starting port B10 than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged so as to overlap, and due to the existence of the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port The upper part of the mouth B10 is closed. Further, the game ball flowing down the game area D30 is configured to be guided to the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 from either the right side or the left side.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory may be provided on the first main game starting port A10 side. You can. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged so as to overlap, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are The second main game starting port B10 may be configured to be spaced apart from each other.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entry ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10. do. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 becomes an opportunity for a lottery to expand the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in this embodiment, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. The arrangement of the auxiliary game starting port H10 is not limited to that of this example, and may be arranged so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. Alternatively, if two auxiliary game starting ports H10 are provided and the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Either may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10.

Next, on the upper right side of the out port D36, a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20 are provided. , is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops as a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize winning opening detection device C11s) An electric accessory solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the first big winning hole C11s. generate. The first big winning hole electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning hole C10 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first big winning hole C10 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to win. 1 big prize opening The electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and variable). In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called A tongue type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the path where the game ball can roll is used as the big prize opening and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that becomes open when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located on the upper right side of the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize winning opening detection device C21s) An electric accessory solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second grand prize opening C20, and the second grand prize opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. generate. The game ball that enters the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d operates the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening C20 and in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the prize. Make it variable. In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the path where the game ball can roll is used as the big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide type attacker). This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is connected to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device that executes the displayed information, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) has a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), and a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g). It includes a symbol retention display section A21h (second main game symbol retention display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h (second main game symbol reservation display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". '' and ``-'' to indicate a loss. It is preferable to display the information using a symbol or the like. In addition, the display of the number of pending items is not limited to four lamps, but can display a maximum of four pending items (for example, if the number of pending items is composed of one lamp, Number 1: On, number 2 on hold: Flashing at low speed, Number on hold 3: Flashing at medium speed, Number 4 on hold: Flashing at high speed.

In addition, since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a performance role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size of the image is set to an inconspicuous level. However, if a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a dramatic role and the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is not displayed, The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be configured to be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

Next, the performance display device SG is a device that displays a performance image including decorative symbols that fluctuate and stop in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the performance display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which a performance including a fluctuating display of decorative symbols and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first reservation display section SG12 (and a second reservation display section SG13) that displays main game reservation information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations imitating a slot machine game, for example. It has a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first reservation display section SG12 (and the second reservation display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that performs display regarding auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations suspended (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a passage for the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays the role of effect by blinking or the like. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between D14 and the game effect lamp D26, and outputs sound effects according to the game state and the like. In addition, in this example, when executing left-handed hitting (launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the board), also right-handed hitting (launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the board) By configuring the game ball so that it can flow down near the second main game starting port B10 even during execution, and by configuring it so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the auxiliary game starting port H10 when performing left-handed hitting, it is possible to essentially play left-handed. During execution, it is difficult to enter the second main game starting port B10 (because the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is closed), and when executing a right-handed ball, it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10 ( When the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is open). However, the position of the second main game starting port B10 is not limited to this, but the position of the second main game starting port B10 is set to the right side of the board, that is, when playing left-handed, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the vicinity of the second main game starting port B10, and when playing right-handed, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the vicinity of the second main game starting port B10. The configuration may be such that the game ball can easily reach the vicinity of the second main game starting opening B10.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular controls the overall game operation (i.e., the lottery when a ball enters the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10)). The main control board M performs control directly related to the interests of players, and the performance control means (sub-main control) performs display control related to various performances on the performance display device SG that adds interest to game content part) SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the performance display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with winnings to each prize opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE that includes a payout unit KE10 etc. that pays out to the tray D20, a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and game balls (storage balls) in the upper ball tray D20. A firing device D42 that fires balls one by one into the gaming area D30, a firing control board D40 that controls the firing operation of the firing device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the Pachinko gaming machine, and a power supply for the Pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on and off the player, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 3. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and a payout of game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M, various performances are performed on the performance display device SG, such as fluctuating and stopping decorative patterns, and sound is output from the speaker D24. A sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control unit SM and a sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) controls execution of lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. The main component is a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stoppage of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. and a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display, stop display, hold display, preview display, etc. of decorative symbols on the performance display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various calculation processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that specifies the calculation processes of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the game (various data generated during gaming, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection between each board and device will be outlined below.

First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s, second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s.
, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s, the general winning detection device (not shown, but the general winning hole is a winning hole where there is a prize ball but no symbol lottery is performed). (a ball opening)}, drive solenoids (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to input/output devices that are essential for the progress of the game, and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control unit SM/sub-sub control unit SS), and controls the prize ball payout based on the progress of the game. It is configured to be able to transmit information (commands) regarding the prize ball payout control board KH, etc., and information (commands) regarding the performance/game progress, etc. to the sub-control board S, respectively. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC etc. via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. The system is configured so that game-related information can be output from the player to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). Note that communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. In addition, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (on the hall computer HC side) via an external relay terminal board (not shown). (one-way communication).

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for loaning game balls and sends the prize ball payout control board KH to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits the information. Although not shown, in this embodiment, a control circuit for the firing device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the firing device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device) are included. etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided as a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine, and in that case, the prize ball lending device R is lent out by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money etc. may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the performance display device SG for displaying decorative patterns etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other performance drive devices (not shown). . In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control board S has a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( The lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantive display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is composed of In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (they may be configured as separate boards). (However, by configuring it in an integrated manner, there are advantages such as space advantage and the ability to reduce the situation where noise gets mixed in with wiring, etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, by having the sub-sub control unit SS perform audio control (suitable when a VDP with an integrated audio control circuit is adopted). Moreover, electronic value may be provided as the prize ball without providing a physical prize ball.

Next, various functions of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, etc. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE that includes a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. In addition, the main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of elements such as ROM and RAM used for processing, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in peripheral equipment (for example, gaming peripheral equipment) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each of the above means (devices) will be explained below.

Note that "random numbers" in the claims and this specification include, for example, "0" to "65535" or "0" to "65535" assigned depending on the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number determining random number). This value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as ``255''. Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudorandom number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method for each value in a random number is one in which values are expressed sequentially along the sequence of random numbers (plus-one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

In addition, the limited frequency means that the type and/or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after a specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the same as the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) that is different from the type and/or selection rate, and continues for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is called the limited frequency table, and there may be multiple types of limited frequency tables, such as the end of the game state and special game. The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the number of changes in the main game symbols afterward. In addition, if there are limited frequency tables X and Y as limited frequency tables, if the limited frequency table Y is referenced from the state in which limited frequency table X is referenced (also referred to as limited frequency X state), Switching to the current state (also referred to as the limited frequency Y state) is referred to as a transition of the limited frequency state. It should be noted that a single gaming state can have multiple limited frequency states, that is, a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduction gaming state, a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reducing gaming state, and a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state. It is configured such that any one of the four gaming states, the shortened gaming state, the non-probability variable gaming state, and the non-time shortened gaming state, can have a plurality of limited frequency states, and one gaming state can have a plurality of limited frequency states. The limited frequency state changes one or more times in , that is, a probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, a non-probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, It may also be configured such that the limited frequency state changes one or more times in any one of the four gaming states: the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state. In addition, when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to a lottery table for determining limited frequency variation mode (sometimes referred to as a limited frequency table), a different limited frequency table is used when the limited frequency state is different. (a table in which all or some of the selection candidates for the variation mode are different), or a common limited frequency table may be referenced to vary the selection rate of the variation mode (i.e., a table in which the selection candidates for the variation mode are all different or partially different). (Alternatively, the variation mode to be selected and the selection rate are the same, but the variation mode to be selected is the same, but the selection rate is different, but the variation time value related to the selected variation mode is further fixed. It may also be configured to adopt a method such as adding values.

Here, the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the Pachinko game machine according to this embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H that can measure time. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment includes a second main game starting opening electric accessory release timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (opening) time of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. There is. Furthermore, the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment includes a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls entering the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t that manages round time.

Here, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example includes a probability change number counter MP51c that can count the number of probability changes, and a time reduction number counter MP52c that can count the number of time reductions. Here, the term "specific game" refers to, for example, a probability variable game where the lottery probability for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the main game symbol variation time is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbols is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of variations of the first main game symbol and the number of variations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). Note that the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of, for example, performing a lottery to transition from a specific game (for example, a probability variable game or a time saving game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (in the case of a pachinko machine with a so-called falling lottery function).

Next, gaming peripherals will be explained. Note that since the detailed configurations of some of the peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly explained. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side. and a first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, a sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and a sub-sub control unit. SS (and effect display device SG), etc. Here, the performance controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the decorative symbols in time synchronization with the variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, and affects the result of the game. This relates to the display of only information that does not have any impact. Below, these peripheral devices will be explained in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game starting port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can stop and display the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the second main game symbols in a static and variable manner. It has .

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is the first big prize opening C10 which is in a closed state during a normal game and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (jackpot). and a second grand prize opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H operates the auxiliary game starting port H10, which is the trigger for opening the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, and the stop display and variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that is capable of.

Here, the drawing variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative design.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying images.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols, and a first reservation display section SG12 (and a second reservation display section SG13) for displaying main game reservation information. ing.

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control section) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control device. Means (sub-main control unit) means controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 4 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the gaming machine is powered on, the process shown in FIG. 2(a) is executed. That is, after powering on the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button (RAM clear button) has been operated, that is, whether an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by an administrator of the gaming hall or the like. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the gaming state temporary storage means MB, etc.). Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (sent at the timing). (or a command may be set at that timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process to be described later), and the process moves to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, checksum recorded at the time of power outage and saved in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information provided). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (whether the information at the time of power outage is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process moves to step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M at the time of power failure. At step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands are set at the relevant timing and will be described later). (The control command may be transmitted in the control command transmission process), and the process moves to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) {As a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the random number update in step 1018 The process moves on to processing (for example, incrementing a random number counter). Note that after step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 3(b) based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory drive determination process to be described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process to be described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process to be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process to be described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (particularly the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning hole in which the game ball has won. The prize ball payout control board KH executes processing for managing the results, etc.). Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command sending process (sending the commands set in the above-mentioned processes to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before executing this interrupt process. Returns to the process that was being executed.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. As mentioned above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power-off signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the process shown in FIG. is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed through) the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game content determining random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the number of pending balls while temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M, together with information on how many balls are on hold; The process moves to the next process (the process of step 1200). Note that even in the case of No in step 1102 and step 1104, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag), as well as the acquired gaming state of the auxiliary game side and the corresponding The main control determines the stopping symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off). It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining auxiliary game stop symbols. As shown in the same table, in this example, there are "D0, D1" as the stopping symbols, and the stopping symbol that becomes the winning symbol is "D1", which is released due to each stopping. The opening mode of the electric accessory is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed) when the stopped symbol is "D1" during non-time reduction games. In addition, during the time reduction game, if the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.2 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 3.0 seconds → 4. (open for 0 seconds → closed). In addition, during a non-time reduction game, the stopped symbol is likely to become a losing symbol "D0", and during a time reduced game, the stopped symbol is likely to become a winning symbol "D1".

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation time to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). Set a predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reservation information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M (subtracts the auxiliary game reservation ball by 1), and also updates the reservation information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. After starting the timer MP11t-H, variable display of the auxiliary game symbols is started on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols, and displays the acquired stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols as confirmed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "hit" (in this example, D1). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (for example, the winning symbol " D1" stops, if the auxiliary game time saving flag is off, the opening mode is "0.2 seconds open → closed", and if the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the opening mode is "0.2 seconds open → closed". Open → Close for 0.2 seconds → Open for 0.2 seconds → Close for 3.0 seconds → Open for 4.0 seconds → Close. Set the second main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 {based on the opening mode determined in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game starting opening B11d. Open (or close) the mouth electric accessory B11d}. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening end timing of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d has been reached. If Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, and sets the electric accessory opening flag. It is turned off and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1300).

Note that if No in step 1202, the process moves to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process moves to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process moves to (processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, the process moves to the next step immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process can be performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). is achievable).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s of the first main game starting opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially on the first main game side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determining random number, a win/fail lottery random number for determining win/fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. We have obtained three random numbers for the variation lottery random number. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are successively acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game content determination random number has been acquired (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s of the second main game starting opening B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly on the second main game side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers are acquired, which are a win/fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variable mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win/fail lottery random numbers for the first main game and the win/fail lottery random numbers for the second main game) are set the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a command sending buffer for sending information indicating that the second main game content determining random number has been obtained (pending generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. The control command is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). Note that in the case of No in step 1302 and step 1304, the process moves to step 1312, and in the case of No in step 1312 and step 1314, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, in step 1310 and step 1320, the sub-main control unit SM
Although the information to the effect that a random number has been obtained is sent to It is also possible to use this information as a substitute.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks whether or not the second main game symbol is on hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process {the process in step 1600}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process to be described later, and moves to the next process {the process of step 1600}.

In this way, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of a reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol) (even if the first main game symbol comes first), the configuration is such that the second main game symbol is prioritized and executed, but the invention is not limited to this (the first main game symbol may be prioritized, (It may also be configured to perform a pending redemption based on the winning order or a parallel lottery in which both main game symbols are drawn in parallel).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, this process is approximately the same process for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, so the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not in fluctuation, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed variation time (time during which the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed after the main game symbol is displayed) is provided, during the fixed variation time, the variation start condition for the next variation is set. It may be configured so that it does not satisfy.

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the first main game content determining random number ( At the same time, the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) is read out, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is read out. Shift (pending digestion processing). Next, in step 1408, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning lottery based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (particularly the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game win/fail lottery table (second main game win/fail lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the variable probability gaming state is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this in any way. Further, in this embodiment, a small win is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a structure may be adopted in which a small win is provided on the first main game side and/or the second main game side.

Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols related to the symbols are determined and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game stop symbol determination lottery table (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won, one of the main game symbol candidates (in this example, "2A, 3A, 5A, 7A" and "2B, 7B") is selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 2R for 2A, 4R for 2B, 8R for 3A, 5A, and 7A, and 16R for 7B. That is, the structure is such that the number of rounds executed during a jackpot on the second main game side is relatively greater than the jackpot on the first main game side. Furthermore, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these {for example, the losing symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, but may be configured to have multiple types of symbols. }.

Next, in step 1411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency flag is off (whether or not both the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag are off). do. In the case of Yes in step 1411-1, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the main game symbol winning/failure lottery result and the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (in particular, the variation mode lottery The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the random numbers), these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process moves to step 1418.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode (the lottery table for determining the second main game variation mode). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol. That is, when the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is configured such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is likely to be determined. It should be noted that this example is just an example, and there is no limitation to the type of stopped symbols, selection rate, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have different tables depending on the number of reserved balls, but it is configured to have different tables depending on the number of reserved balls. Needless to say, this is a good thing. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) is relatively long {the symbols on the second main game side When the structure is such that it is advantageous for the player to execute fluctuations, by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency on the first main game side, retention on the second main game side is likely to occur (advantageous for the player). Since the purpose is to create a situation in which the following occurs, it is particularly effective in cases where it is not possible to distinguish between the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side.

On the other hand, if No in step 1411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency A flag is on in step 1411-2. If Yes in step 1411-2, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency A variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1418. Incidentally, if No in step 1411-2, that is, if the limited frequency B flag is on, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency B variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and in step 1418. to move to.

Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends commands related to the main game symbols (stopped symbol information, attribute information of the stopped symbols, variation mode information, etc.) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, A command related to the current gaming state (symbol variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process in step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side ). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol fluctuation time in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first main game symbol display device A2.
0 (second main game symbol display device B20) on the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), according to the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M Start changing display of game symbols. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1428.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuating flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, in step 1428, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbols has been reached. If Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command for sending information (symbol finalization display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM to the effect that the symbol variation is finished. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stops the fluctuating display of the main game symbols on the main control board M, and controls the display of the stopped symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as fixed stopped symbols. Next, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag.

Next, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If YES in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device activation flag in step 1438, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1436, the process moves to step 1550.

Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that even in the case of No in step 1428, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 9 in this embodiment. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols based on the random numbers on the main game side and the win/fail lottery results. Next, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a command related to the fluctuation time regarding the determined main game symbol) (step 1999). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process). Next, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag in step 1460, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1418). Note that even in the case of No in step 1458, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing according to the present embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the first stage range (the limited frequency which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether the value is within the range of the counter value of the B counter MN52c-2 (100≧G>90). In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random numbers on the main game side and the winning/fail lottery results, and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols. is determined, and the process moves to step 1512.

On the other hand, if No in step 1502, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the second stage range (in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether the counter value is within the range of the second-stage limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 and 90≧G>1). If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the random numbers on the main game side and the winning/fail lottery results, and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols. is determined, and the process moves to step 1512. On the other hand, if No in step 1506, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the third stage range (limited frequency B counter that is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value of MN52c-2 and G=1), in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency based on the random number on the main game side, the lottery result, and the number of reservations. The variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols is determined with reference to Table 3, and the process moves to 1512.

Next, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a limited frequency B command {a command to the sub-control board S side, and a command related to the variation mode (variation time) regarding the determined main game symbols}. The CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 in step 1514. , the process moves to step 1516. Next, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency B flag in step 1518, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1418). Note that even in the case of No in step 1516, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1418). As described above, in this embodiment, there are two types of limited frequency states (limited frequency A state in which the counter value of limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is subtracted and limited frequency state in which the counter value of limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is subtracted). The limited frequency B state) has a limited frequency.

Next, FIG. 13 is an example of limited frequency tables 1 to 3. First, to explain the limited frequency table 1 in detail, in this embodiment, if the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is a value within a predetermined range (100≧G>90), or if the limited frequency A When the counter value of counter MN52c-1 is greater than 0, limited frequency table 1 is referred to. Note that the tables referenced by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Also, the fluctuation time when winning is relatively long compared to the fluctuation time when losing. Note that when compared with limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3, limited frequency table 1 is configured so that the average fluctuation time is the shortest. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved pitches. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 2, or the limited frequency table 3 is referred to, that is, the limited frequency A state or the limited frequency B state, the time reduction gaming state is entered. The game is configured so that the second main game symbols mainly change to advance the game (the reservation on the second main game side is given priority and is used up). Also, regarding the description of the number of reservations in the same figure, in the table referred to when determining the fluctuation mode on the first main game side, it is the number of reservations on the first main game side, and the fluctuation mode on the second main game side is described. In the table referred to when making the determination, it is the number of reservations on the second main game side.

Next, to explain the limited frequency table 2 in detail, in this embodiment, when the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within a predetermined range (90≧G>1), the limited frequency table 2 2 is referenced. Note that the tables referenced by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of winning is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss (tables with long fluctuation times are more likely to be selected). Note that when compared with limited frequency table 1 and limited frequency table 3, limited frequency table 2 is configured so that the average fluctuation time is the longest. In addition, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average fluctuation time at the time of a loss is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

Next, to explain the limited frequency table 3 in detail, in this embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c-2 is within a predetermined range (G=1). Note that the tables referenced by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, there is only one type of variable time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3, and it is constant regardless of the winning/failure lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

Note that the contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage), the contents of the limited frequency table to be referred to can be changed between the first main game side and the second main game side. They may be configured to be the same. Further, at a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reservations (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If this is not the case, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of reservations, and the second main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of reservations, and the second main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of reservations. It is desirable to configure the structure so that the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that they are switched in three stages in the order of "limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3" (so-called 3-stage ST). There is no limit to the number of types of limited frequency tables, and there is no problem even if the order of the referenced tables is changed. Furthermore, it has two tables, Limited Frequency Table 1 and Limited Frequency Table 2, and the tables to be referred to are switched in the order of Limited Frequency Table 1 → Limited Frequency Table 2 → Limited Frequency Table 1 as a 3-step ST mode. Good too.

In this embodiment, the limited frequency may be configured as follows.
(1) When determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol in the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) (the first main game symbol fluctuates), the first main game symbol Even when determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol without depending on the number of reservations, that is, with reference to the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the limited frequency table 2 related to the first main game symbol are the same as the first main game symbol. (For example, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, refer to the table when the number of reservations in the limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1. ).
(2) Regarding the limited frequency table 1, similarly to the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of reservations (the number of reservations on the second main game side).
(3) When transitioning to the limited frequency B state, the limited frequency table 2 may be the first referenced limited frequency table.
(4) In Figure 13, for locations where the table to be referenced in the case of a win and the table to be referred to in the case of a loss have the same time value, the time value in the case of a win is compared to the time value in the case of a loss. For example, for limited frequency table 3, 5 seconds is selected in both cases of winning and losing, but for limited frequency table 3, 6 seconds is selected in case of winning. In the case of a loss, the time period may be set to 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure time for notifying the player of the win.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may have multiple variations (preferably less than 10 variations); for example, the limited frequency table 3 is configured to be referenced when the limited frequency counter value is between 1 and 5. You may.
(6) Each table in the figure (limited frequency tables 1 to 3, all tables referred to in the case of winning, losing, 0 to 1 pending, 2 to 3 pending, and 16 For any one of the tables), the number of variable time candidates may be increased by one more type, for example, all tables may be configured to have two or more variable time candidates. In such a configuration, as an example of a time value to be added, a time value twice as long as the longest time value held by each table may be added, and in that case, the random value range will be the longest time value. The random value range of the time value may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of loss on the second main game side in limited frequency table 1, "Random value 0 to 799 → 1 second", "Random value 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "Random value 912-1023→6 seconds".

In addition, in a configuration where the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability variable gaming state (or time reduction gaming state) changes, the limited frequency X state and limited frequency table Y that refer to the limited frequency table If the limited frequency of reference is Y state,
(1) In the limited frequency Y state, the average value of the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations that result in a loss when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0) and the number of reservations is the second number of reservations (for example, 3 There is a difference in the average value for a predetermined period from the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that results in a loss in the case of 1).
(2) In the state of limited frequency There is no difference in the average value for a predetermined period with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that results in a loss in the case of 1).
(3) The second number of reservations (for example, three) in the limited frequency Y state is the most selected than the fluctuation time that is most likely to be selected in the second reservation number (for example, three) in the limited frequency X state. The fluctuation time that is more likely to cause a loss is longer.
(4) The limited frequency Y state stays for a longer period (the number of fluctuations) than the limited frequency X state.
(5) A specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency Y state is not displayed in the limited frequency X state. (6) In the case of the time reduction game state, the look-ahead effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are multiple effect display formats (staying stages) in the limited frequency Y state, there is only one effect display format (staying stage) in the limited frequency X state.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency Y state and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency X state are different in type.
It may be configured as follows. Further, a plurality of these configurations may be combined, or only one configuration may be applied. Note that each limited frequency state only needs to stay for a period in which one or more symbol variations are executed (stay at least for a period longer than one symbol variation is executed). Further, as a modification, the limited frequency X state may be a state in which limited frequency table 1 in FIG. The X state may be a state that refers to the limited frequency table 1 in FIG. 13, and the limited frequency Y state may be a state that refers to the limited frequency table 3 in FIG. 13, or the limited frequency X state may be set to the limited frequency table 1 in FIG. 2 may be referred to, and the limited frequency Y state may be set to be a state where limited frequency table 3 in FIG. 13 is referred to.

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process related to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1574, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570, or step 1574, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the conditional device activation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time shortening flag, auxiliary game time shortening flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter values of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the conditional device activation flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1700). Note that even in the case of No in step 1602, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1700).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in steps 1704 and 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect of starting a special game (special game start display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information to the sub-main control unit SM side. is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process moves to step 1711.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process moves to step 1711. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that permission for the special game is not granted, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1711, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the round currently being executed is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22 will be opened, and in this example Then, it is determined whether it is the second round). In the case of Yes in step 1711, in step 1800, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distributed game execution process to be described later, and moves to step 1734. On the other hand, if No in step 1711, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether it is immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continues opening, a pattern that opens and closes). do. Next, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, step 1
At 720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d) of the first big winning hole C10 to open the first big winning hole C10 ( Alternatively, the second big prize opening C20) is opened and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process moves to step 1722 without performing steps 1714 to 1720.

Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a game status command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) during the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in this round, the CPUMC enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 It is determined whether there is a winning ball (ball). If YES in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and sets the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) for opening the big prize opening. It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed. If YES in step 1726, the process also moves to step 1728. Note that in the case of No in step 1726, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d of the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d of the second big winning hole C20). to close the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of a round number counter (not shown), and proceeds to step 1734. Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the final round has ended (for example, whether the counter value of a round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). . If Yes in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag in step 1736. Next, in step 1738, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect of ending the special game (special game end display instruction command) to the command sending buffer MT10 for sending the information to the sub-main control unit SM side. set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). Note that even in the case of No in step 1734, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 16 in this embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distributed game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1802, the process moves to step 1816. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (in the distribution game execution round, the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot symbol in which the game ball is easily entered into the specific area C22 (3A, 5A, 7A, 7B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds and , an opening pattern designed to ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 is almost certain, and step 1
The process moves to 810. On the other hand, if No in step 1804, in other words, if the stopped symbol is "2A" or "2B", in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second grand prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. As the pattern, a short release pattern (for example, a release pattern of 0.1 seconds and designed so that it is almost certain that the ball does not enter the specific area C22) is set, and the process moves to step 1810. In addition, in this embodiment, the long open symbols on the first main game side are "3A, 5A, 7A", and the ratio selected at the time of jackpot is "524/1024", and the second main game side The long opening symbol on the game side is "7B", and the ratio of selection at the time of jackpot is "774/1024", so the jackpot on the second main game side is more likely to be hit than the jackpot on the first main game side. It is configured such that the second grand prize opening C20 is more likely to be opened long in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball is more likely to enter the specific area C22 at the time of a jackpot. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine (sometimes referred to as an ST machine) in which the probability variable gaming state ends when the symbols change a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot symbols on the second main game side All may be configured to have long open symbols. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot that is executed when the long open symbols "3A, 5A, 7A" on the first main game side stop is "8R", and the long open symbols on the second main game side The number of execution rounds of the jackpot executed when a certain "7B" stops is "16R", and the number of execution rounds is different. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot executed when "2A", which is a short opening symbol on the first main game side, stops is "2R", and "2B", which is a short opening symbol on the second main game side, is executed. The number of execution rounds of the jackpot that is executed by stopping is "4R", and the number of execution rounds is different.

Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distributed game execution flag. Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and moves to step 1816.

Next, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have entered the second big prize opening C20. Determine whether If YES in step 1816, the process moves to step 1820. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1816, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If YES in step 1818, the process moves to step 1820. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distributed game execution flag. Next, in step 1824, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1827, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a specific area ball entry command (a command to the sub-control board S side, indicating that a game ball has entered the specific area C22) under sub-main control. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side (it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1828. Note that if the answer in step 1824 is No, the process also moves to step 1828. Next, in step 1828, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) by 1 (ends the distributed game execution round), and performs the next process (step 1734). processing). Note that even in the case of No in step 1818, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1734).

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a specific area C22 within the second grand prize opening C20,
Even in a gaming machine where a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a jackpot and shifts to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, the ease of entering the ball into the specific area C22 is configured to differ depending on the jackpot symbol. ing.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won a predetermined number of times in a row in a probability-variable gaming state, a gaming machine (also referred to as a limiter machine) that shifts to a non-probability-variable gaming state after the predetermined number of jackpots is completed. ), or it may be a gaming machine (a so-called falling lottery machine) that executes a lottery in which the probability fluctuates gaming state shifts to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state.

Note that configuration examples applicable to this embodiment are illustrated below.
(1) The expected value of the number of prize balls in a jackpot on the second main game side is greater than the expected value of the number of prize balls in a jackpot on the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of long open jackpots among the jackpots on the second main game side (jackpots that easily enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) is higher than the ratio of long open jackpots among the jackpots on the first main game side. expensive.
(3) Depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot ends differs.
(4) Depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the transition mode of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is different (for example, jackpot A: 20 fluctuation, table 1 → 30 fluctuation, table 2, jackpot B: 50 variations, Table 3).
(5) Depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, whether or not the probability fluctuating game state will be established after the jackpot is over differs.
(6) Regardless of whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the time reduction game state is entered after the jackpot ends.
(7) The stay stage after the jackpot is different depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot.
(8) Depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the fluctuation tendency of the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends is different (average value of fluctuation time, performance mode, shortest fluctuation that can be selected) time).
(9) A gaming machine is configured in which the probability variable gaming state can be terminated depending on the number of symbol changes after the end of the jackpot (so-called ST machine), and it always shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side. (A case may be provided in which the state does not shift to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot on the first main game side ends).
(10) A gaming machine is configured in which the probability-variable gaming state does not end depending on the number of symbol changes after the end of the jackpot, and the probability-variable gaming state remains in the probability-variable gaming state even after the jackpot on the first main game side and after the jackpot on the second main game side ends. There are cases where the transition occurs and cases where the transition does not occur (it is easier to transition to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends on the second main game side than after the end of the jackpot on the first main game side, that is, after the jackpot ends on the second main game side The jackpot on the main game side is more likely to be a jackpot in which the ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot than the jackpot on the first main game side).
In addition, the above configuration is configured such that by entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot, the game enters the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and therefore shifts to the probability variable gaming state. Yes = the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, and does not shift to the probability variable gaming state = the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the jackpot.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1755, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1756, the CP of the main control board M
The UMC sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined value C (in this example, it is 65536, which is the number of time saving times that is almost certain to continue until the next jackpot win, and may be set to ∞ times. ), and the process moves to step 1776.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1758, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot related to the second main game side has ended. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1776. On the other hand, if No in step 1758, that is, after the jackpot related to the first main game side has ended, in step 1762, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the jackpot related to the short opening symbol has ended. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1762, in step 1764, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined value A (a value smaller than the above-mentioned predetermined values B and C, in this example, 10). Set. Next, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag. Next, in step 1768, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (10 in this example) in the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1, and proceeds to step 1776. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1762, in step 1770, a predetermined value B (100 in this example) is set in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1774, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1776.

Next, in step 1776, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1778, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). As described above, in this embodiment, if the probability fluctuation game state does not change after the jackpot ends, in other words, if the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the second main game side After the jackpot ends, all the games shift to the time-saving game state, and a relatively large number of time-savings (100 times in this example) is given. On the other hand, after the jackpot on the first main game side ends, all the machines will shift to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, but the number of time reductions that can be awarded is relatively large (in this example, 100 times). There are two types of time saving times: and a relatively small number of time saving times (10 times in this example). In addition, if the state does not shift to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot on the first main game side ends, the limited frequency A state (the case where the limited frequency A flag is on may be referred to as the limited frequency A state) or the limited frequency A state It is configured to shift to a frequency B state (the case where the limited frequency B flag is on is sometimes referred to as a limited frequency B state). That is, there is a case where the ball does not enter the specific area C22 due to a jackpot on the first main game side and shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and a case where the ball does not enter the specific area C22 due to a jackpot on the second main game side. The difference between the case where the player shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends without any change is whether or not the player shifts to the limited frequency state (the selection tendency of the variation mode is different).

Alternatively, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether the game state in which the special game is won is a time-saving game state or not, if the special game is a special game on the second main game side, the number of time-saving times is 100.
(2) If you win the special game on the first main game side in the time reduction game state, the number of time reductions will be 100, but if you win the special game on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state Based on the jackpot symbol related to the special game, the number of time reductions is 60, 80, or 100.
(3) If a special game is won in the time reduction game state, the number of time reductions will be 100 regardless of the jackpot symbol.
(4) The average number of time reductions when winning the special game on the first main game side in the time reduction game state is the average value of the number of time reductions when winning the special game on the second main game side in the time reduction game state. greater than the average value. In such a configuration, the second main game side has priority play, and the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the jackpot on the first main game side<the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the jackpot on the second main game side. ”, it is possible to compensate for the disadvantage in the case of winning a jackpot on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state. In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called ball guarantee machine) in which a game ball enters a specific area C22 in the big winning opening during a jackpot and enters a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends (so-called ball-locking machine), "first main gaming side If the ratio of long-open jackpots on the second main game side is less than the ratio of long-open jackpots on the second main game side, the short-open jackpot is won and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the short-open jackpot. The number of time reductions when there is no ball may be configured so that the short open jackpot on the first main game side is relatively larger than the short open jackpot on the second main game side. In addition, if you win a long open jackpot on the first main game side and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the long open jackpot, the number of time reductions is higher than the short open jackpot on the second main game side. It may be configured so that the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times when a jackpot is won and no game ball enters the specific area C22 during the short opening jackpot. In addition, if you win a long open jackpot on the second main game side and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the long open jackpot, the number of time reductions is higher than the short open jackpot on the first main game side. It may be configured so that the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times when a jackpot is won and no game ball enters the specific area C22 during the short opening jackpot. In addition, a long open jackpot is a big winning opening in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot (by the game ball entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the round, the state shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends). It is a jackpot in which the ball enters the specific area C22 easily by keeping it open for a relatively long time, and a short-open jackpot is a round in which a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot (during the execution of the round, the game ball enters the specific area C22). This is a jackpot in which it is difficult to enter the specific area C22 because the jackpot opens for a relatively short time (by entering the jackpot, the player shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends).
(5) If a ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, after the special game ends, the game transitions to the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state, and also to the limited frequency B state, The time saving number counter MP52c is set to 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency B counter) is set to 100 times. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, after the special game ends, the game transitions to a non-probability variable game state and a time reduction game state, and also to a limited frequency A state, The time saving number counter MP52c is set to 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency A counter) is set to 100 times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25, the control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 4A is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing (for example, RAM clearing) based on information received from the main side (main control board M side). When information is received, the RAM on the sub side is initialized; when various information commands are received, information related to production at the time of power outage is reset to the RAM on the sub side). Thereafter, the process shifts to a loop process in which the sub-main control unit SM repeatedly executes the repeat process routine (b). Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pending information management process, which will be described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes special game-related display control processing to be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sending the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a configuration in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process shown in FIG. 2(c) is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M mentioned above is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is connected to the command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately stores the command sent from the main control board M side. Returns to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a new hold generation command (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. do. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing holding counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1” is added (incremented). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives reservation information (in particular, a random number related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a win/fail lottery) based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. Random numbers, symbol lottery random numbers, variation mode lottery random numbers) are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process moves to step 2116.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts (decrements) "1" from the drawing pending counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the reservation information (random value) related to the symbol variation from the reservation information temporary storage area, and shifts the remaining reservation information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. Note that if No in step 2108, the process moves to step 2116 without executing the processes in steps 2110 to 2114. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display section SG12, the second hold display section SG13). is lit and displayed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If YES in step 2302, CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2304. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the stop symbols of the decorative symbols {for example, if the stop symbols related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S , in the case of a losing symbol, the winning numbers such as "1, 3, 5" and the fluctuation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). Note that even in the case of No in step 2302, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2402, CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2404. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol fluctuation flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2402, the process moves to step 2410.

Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation flag is on. If Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the decorative pattern variation start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative pattern variation display command (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , the process moves to step 2426.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the decorative pattern stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ), and the process moves to step 2426.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has been reached based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the CPUSC sets the image display command on the sub-sub control unit SS side). (transmitted) and the process moves to step 2426. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2422, the process moves to step 2426.

Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the main game symbols are stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 2426, in step 2436, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). be done) Next, in step 2438, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the flag during symbol fluctuation, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2500). Note that even in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2504, in steps 2506 and 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game flag and displays a jackpot start display on the effect display device SG (as appropriate based on the type of jackpot). display), the process moves to step 2550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the process moves to step 2550. Next, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special in-game effect execution process, which will be described later.

Next, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot end display on the performance display device SG (the display is performed as appropriate based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2524, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 2600). Note that even in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2520, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game performance execution process related to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. 23. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game being executed is a special game related to long open symbols. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of rounds and the number of prizes in numbers, and proceeds to step 2558. If the result in step 2552 is No, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of prizes won numerically and also displays an object image (for example, an image of a crystal ball) related to the number of rounds. The command is set and the process moves to step 2558. As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot related to a long open symbol, the number of rounds is displayed numerically, while in the case of a jackpot related to a short open symbol, the round number is not displayed numerically but as an object image. configured to display. In addition, as the number of rounds is displayed as an object image rather than as a number, depending on the execution of a round in which the opening time of the grand prize opening is relatively short (such as a round in which almost no game balls can be obtained), the object image may be displayed. It may be configured such that the number of object images does not increase and the number of object images increases depending on the execution of a round in which the opening time of the grand prize opening is relatively long (such as a round in which more than a certain number of game balls can be obtained). In such a configuration, the number of rounds may be displayed numerically only in the case of a jackpot in which all the rounds executed are rounds in which the opening time of the jackpot is relatively long. good. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of object images related to the number of rounds is increased, but the present invention is not limited to this. At the start of the special game, a plurality of object images related to the number of rounds (opening of the grand prize opening Display the same number of object images as the number of times rounds in which the time is relatively long are executed, and subtract the object images (1 For example, if the number of executed rounds is 15 and the actual number of rounds is 8, 8 object images may be displayed at the start of the special game. do). Furthermore, the number of prize balls to be won may be displayed at the start of the special game. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls scheduled to be acquired is calculated as follows: Actual number of rounds x Number of prize balls if one ball enters the grand prize opening x Ball entering the grand prize opening that triggers the end of the round It may also be configured to display "number". In addition, in such a configuration, the number of rounds and the object image may be displayed simultaneously, or the number of rounds and the object image may not be displayed.

Next, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a specific area entry command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on a specific area ball entry flag (a flag that, when turned on, executes the ball entry effect described later), and in step 2562 to move to. It should be noted that even if the answer in step 2558 is No, the process moves to step 2560.

Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the specific area entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the ball entering effect execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2564, in steps 2566 and 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute a specific area ball entry effect (an effect to notify that a game ball has entered the specific area C22). At the same time, the specific area entry flag is turned off, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). Note that even in the case of No in step 2562 or step 2564, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2520). Here, the ball entry performance execution timing may be set as appropriate as long as it is later than the timing at which the game ball enters the specific area C22, for example, the game ball enters the first grand prize opening C10. The timing may be the same, or it may be any timing during the round that is executed after the distribution game execution round (or any distribution game execution round if the distribution game execution round is executed multiple times). Alternatively, it may be during the demonstration period when the jackpot ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the notification that the ball has entered the specific area C22 is notified during the execution of the special game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is certain that the ball enters the special game and the transition to the probability variable game state occurs after the special game ends, the special game is played without notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The stay stage after the end is the same stay stage in the non-probability fluctuating game state and time reduction game state and the probability fluctuating game state and time shortening game state, and the current game state is set in the fluctuating production. It may be configured such that it can notify that it is in a probability variable gaming state. In addition, such a configuration may be applied to all long open symbols, or only to some long open symbols (for example, a jackpot that notifies that a ball has entered the specific area C22 during a jackpot). (and a jackpot that is not announced).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process related to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the switching timing of the staying stage {the staying stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (is won), the timing when the gaming state shifts, (the same (even if the game state is the same), the timing when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (even if the game state is the same) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2604, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the limited frequency A command or the limited frequency B command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "night stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the time reduction gaming state is present. If Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "evening stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, in the case of a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "empty stage" as the stay stage, and then The process moves to step 2999 (step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 2602, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). In this way, if the state does not shift to the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot on the first main game side (when the limited frequency A command or the limited frequency B command is received), the "night stage" is set, and the second If the game state does not shift to the probability variable game state after the jackpot on the main game side ends, it will move to the "evening stage", that is, the jackpot on the first main game side will hit the jackpot without entering the specific area C22. In the case where the game state shifts to a non-probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot, and in the case where the game state shifts to a non-probability variable game state after the jackpot ends without entering the specific area C22 in the jackpot on the second main game side, the stay stage (performance trends) will be different.

Regarding production trends, "the production trends are the same" may mean that the content of the production itself is the same, or the production group A to which productions A1 to A5 belong (for example, production groups A to which productions A1 to A5 belong) A performance in which a character is introduced is executed as a performance to which the characters belong), and a performance group B to which performances B1 to B5 belong (for example, a battle performance is executed as a performance that belongs to performance group B). ), the performances that belong to the same production group, such as production A1 and production A2 (production A1 and production A2 belong to production group A, which is the same production group), It may also be set as "the direction of production is the same". In addition, "the direction of production is different" may mean that the content of the production itself is different, or it may mean that the content of the production itself is different, or the production group A to which productions A1 to A5 belong (for example, the production group A to which productions A1 to A5 belong) As a performance, a performance in which a character is introduced is executed), a performance group B to which performances B1 to B5 belong (for example, a battle performance is executed as a performance belonging to the performance group B), If the production group A1 and production B2 have at least It may also be defined as "direction trends are different." Note that the concept related to the performance tendency is applicable to all configurations (embodiments) related to this example. In addition, "The production is the same", "The production is different", "The production mode is the same", "The production mode is different", "The stay stage is the same", "The stay stage is different", "The production display format is the same" The same concept can be applied to "the same" and "the presentation display formats are different." That is, in this embodiment, the tendency of the performance executed during symbol variation is configured to differ depending on the performance display format (stay stage), and "stage A" and "stage B" are used as the stay stage. If you have a step-up effect (a preview effect that gradually changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, for example, the display mode of the character changes) in "Stage A". However, in "Stage B", step-up performances are not performed, and movable character There are performances that are driven by characters, group previews (a preview performance in which a group of characters etc. cross the performance display device), and one-shot announcements (driving objects, sounds, background colors, etc. that make it certain that you will win the jackpot). It may be configured such that a performance such as a performance that notifies the user of the current situation can be executed in either "Stage A" or "Stage B." Further, step-up effects can be performed in either "Stage A" or "Stage B," but in "Stage A" only character step-up can be performed as a step-up effect, while in "Stage B" The system of step-up effects that can be executed may be different, such as only a dialogue step-up effect may be executed as a step-up effect.

By configuring as described above, in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a jackpot, the gaming machine shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. In the case of a jackpot related to a long open symbol that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22, and if the probability fluctuation game state does not change after the jackpot ends, the jackpot on the first main game side or the second main game side By configuring the selection tendency of the variation mode after the end of the jackpot (whether or not to shift to the limited frequency state) and the production tendency (staying stage) to be different depending on whether the jackpot ends on the gaming side, the situation of the game can be changed. Various variable time selection trends and presentation trends can be set according to the player's needs, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, during the jackpot execution, by providing a jackpot that displays the number of rounds numerically and a jackpot that displays the number of rounds as an object image, it is possible to prevent the number of rounds from increasing even though no game ball can be obtained. This makes it possible to reduce stress on the player.

(Example 1 of modification from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the selection tendency and performance tendency of the fluctuation mode after the jackpot is configured to differ depending on whether it is after the jackpot on the first main game side or after the jackpot on the second main game side ends. However, the configuration in which the selection tendency and performance tendency of the variation mode after the end of the jackpot are different is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration different from this embodiment will be referred to as modification example 1 from this embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 16 in modification example 1 from this embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 1780 (variation 1), that is, when it is determined in step 1762 that the CPUMC of the main control board M has completed the jackpot related to the long open symbol, step 1780 (variation 1) is changed. In 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot won in the non-time reduction gaming state has ended. If YES in step 1780 (change 1), the process moves to step 1764. On the other hand, if No in step 1780 (variation 1), the process moves to step 1760.

By configuring as described above, in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the jackpot related to the long open symbol, and after the jackpot ends, the non-probability In the case of transitioning to the variable gaming state, the selection tendency and performance tendency of the variable mode after the jackpot ends are different depending on whether or not it is a jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state, thereby reducing the time. After the jackpot won in the gaming state ends, even without entering the specific area C22, the selection tendency and production tendency of the variation pattern can be the same as when the ball enters the specific area C22, and the player does not feel any discomfort. This allows the game to proceed.

In addition, in this embodiment and the first modification from this embodiment, although not shown, from the timing when the final opening of the big prize opening during a round is completed and closed until the start of the next round. Round waiting time. In addition, the length of the round waiting time may be different depending on the round, for example, the round waiting time in the round immediately before the allocation game execution round (the round waiting time before the start of the allocation game execution round) and the round waiting time before the allocation game execution round starts. The round waiting time in the round (the round waiting time after the final opening of the big prize opening in the distribution game execution round is completed and closed) may be made different. In addition, when the 2nd R is the distributed game execution round, "1st R round waiting time (round waiting time before 2nd R start) = X, 2nd R round waiting time (round waiting time before 3rd R start) )=Y, waiting time for rounds other than X and Y=Z", the configuration may be such that "X>Z and/or Y>Z".

(Second embodiment)
In this embodiment, the configuration is such that all the machines shift to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine can also shift to the non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends. The configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be referred to as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process related to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are step 1554 (second), step 1556 (second), step 1558 (second), and step 1560 (second), that is, in step 1554 (second), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the variable probability counter MP51c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1554 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts (decrements) the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 in step 1556 (second). Next, in step 1558 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the variable frequency counter MP51c is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1558 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag in step 1560 (second), and moves to step 1570. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process moves to step 1570. In this way, in the second embodiment, when the game enters the variable probability gaming state after the end of the special game, the variable probability gaming state ends after a predetermined number of symbol variations are executed (also referred to as ST machine). ).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1780-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1780-1, in steps 1780-2 and 1780-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag and turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1780-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (60 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1780-5. Note that even if the answer is No in step 1780-1, the process moves to step 1780-5.

Next, in step 1780-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot won in the time reduction gaming state has ended. If Yes in step 1780-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c in step 1780-6. Next, in steps 1780-7 and 1780-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and also turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1780-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, which causes "space stage" to be set as the stay stage), and then The process moves to step 1997 (step 1997).

If the result in step 1780-5 is No, then in step 1780-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot won in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1780-10, in step 1781-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot related to the first main game side has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1781-1, in step 1781-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot symbol without time saving (a jackpot symbol that may not shift to the time saving gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in this example, 2A, 3A, and 5A) is completed. If Yes in step 1781-2, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Further, if No in step 1781-1 or step 1781-2, in step 1781-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. . Next, in steps 1781-5 and 1781-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and also turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1781-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (a command to the sub side, which causes "evening stage" to be set as the stay stage), and then The process moves to step 1997 (step 1997). In addition, when transitioning to the time reduction game state after the end of the special game (when 100 times are given as the number of time reductions), it is also possible to configure all the stay stages to be transitioned to after the end of the special game to be "space stages". good. In addition, when the game state changes to a probability-variable game state and a non-time-reducing game state after the special game ends, an "underground stage", for example, is set as the stay stage during the probability-variable game state and a non-time-reducing game state. (In the "underground stage", a performance that suggests or informs whether or not it is a probability-variable gaming state is executed, and the "underground stage" is set even in a non-probability-variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. ).

Further, if No in step 1780-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c in step 1781-9. Next, in steps 1781-10 and 1781-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and also turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1781-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, which causes "space stage" to be set as the stay stage), and then The process moves to step 1997 (step 1997).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are entered after the end of the jackpot, the value (60 times) set to the probability variable number counter MP51c is set to the time reduction number counter MP52c. It is less than the set value (100 times). That is, after the jackpot ends, the symbol variation is executed and if the jackpot is not won, "Jackpot ends → Probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state → Probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state remain for 60 seconds." After 40 symbol changes have passed, the game state will change to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time reduction game state → After 40 symbol fluctuations have passed while remaining in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and time reduction gaming state, the state will change to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. The gaming state will change as shown in "Transition to non-time saving gaming state". In addition, if you move to the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state after the jackpot ends, the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state will change symbols 60 times, and the non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state will change 40 times. The number of variations in the probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state is greater than the number of variations in the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state (probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state). (It may be configured such that the number of fluctuations in the gaming state is smaller than the number of fluctuations in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state). When a jackpot related to a jackpot symbol without time saving on the first main game side is won in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time saving game state, the state shifts to a non-time saving game state after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, regardless of the jackpot symbol, after the jackpot is over, the time reduction game state will be entered, and the space stage command will be sent to the sub-control board S side. will be sent to. In other words, in the case where a player wins a jackpot in a probability-changing gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and because the ball did not enter the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the player shifts to a non-probability-changing gaming state and a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends. Also, the stay stage (performance tendency) is configured to be the same as when shifting to the probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2570 (second) to step 2584 (second), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the specific area entry flag in step 2560, or If it is determined in step 2558 that the specific area entry command has not been received from the main control board M side, in step 2570 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board It is determined whether an arbitrary timing has been reached (which is earlier than the execution timing of the time-saving effect which will be described later). If Yes in step 2570 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the specific area entry flag is on or not in step 2572 (second). In the case of Yes in step 2572 (second), in step 2574 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute a successful ball entry effect in a specific area as a probability variation agitation effect, and in step 2578 (second ). If the answer is No in step 2572 (second), then in step 2576 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute a specific area failure effect as a probability variation agitation effect, and in step 2578 ( Move on to 2). Here, the probability variable inciting performance is a performance that incites whether or not to transition to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the specific area successful entry performance notifies that the transition to the probability variable gaming state will occur after the end of the jackpot, The specific area entry failure performance is a performance mode that notifies you that the probability fluctuation game state will not be entered after the end of the jackpot. Note that even in the case of No in step 2570, the process moves to step 2578 (second).

Next, in step 2578 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M reaches the time-saving promotion performance execution timing (an arbitrary timing during the jackpot, which is later than the execution timing of the above-mentioned variable probability promotion performance). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2578 (second), in step 2580 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the gaming state to which the special game is to be transferred after the end of the special game is a time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2580 (second), in step 2582 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute a time-saving transition success effect as a time-saving promotion effect, and performs the next process (step 2520). processing). Further, in the case of No in step 2580, in step 2584 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute a time-saving transition failure effect as a time-saving promotion effect, and performs the next process (processing in step 2520). to move to. Here, the time-saving inciting performance is a performance that incites whether or not to shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the time-saving transition successful performance notifies that the time-reducing gaming state will be entered after the end of the jackpot, and the time-reducing transition The failure performance is a performance mode that notifies the player that the time reduction game state will not be entered after the end of the jackpot. Note that even in the case of No in step 2578 (second), the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2520). In this way, the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute two performances, a probability-changing promotion performance and a time-saving promotion performance, as productions that are executed during a jackpot and suggest the game state after the jackpot ends. That is, by executing the specific area successful entry performance as the probability variable promotion performance and executing the time-saving transfer success performance as the time-saving promotion performance, the player shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is structured so that it can be recognized. It should be noted that the order in which the variable provocation performance and the time-saving provocation performance are performed may be reversed, and there is no problem as long as the two performances are not performed at the same time. In addition, as mentioned above, both the probability variable inciting performance and the time-saving inciting performance are examples of inciting performances, and depending on the execution result of the inciting performance, (1) the transition to a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state after the special game ends; (2) After the special game ends, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (the ball does not enter a specific area and the game state shifts to a non-time saving gaming state). (3) After the special game ends, the probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time reducing gaming state will occur (if a ball enters a specific area, the player will transition to the non-time reducing gaming state). ), or (4) whether or not the game will transition to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduction gaming state after the special game ends (transition to a time-reducing gaming state when a ball enters a specific area). The trends are different. In addition, the inciting performance is executed during the execution of a special game that was won in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state, that is, winning in a gaming state other than a non-probability varying gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state. The system is configured so that the promotion effect is not executed during the execution of the special game, and after the special game won in a game state other than the non-probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state ends, the number of time-savings becomes 100. It may be configured such that the time saving game state is entered and the "space stage" is set as the stay stage.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 19 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2618 (second) and step 2620 (second), that is, in step 2602, it is determined whether the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the staying stage switching timing. After that, in step 2618 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a space stage command has been received from the main control board M side. If YES in step 2618 (second), the process moves to step 2606. Further, if No in step 2618 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage in step 2620 (second), and performs the next process (process in step 2999). to move to. Further, if No in step 2618 (second), in step 2620 (second), the CPU of the sub control board S
The SC determines whether or not it has received the evening stage command from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2620 (second), the process moves to step 2614. Further, in the case of No in step 2620 (second), the process moves to step 2616. Furthermore, the timing at which the stay stage switches may be such that the stay stage is switched when the main game symbol changes (the symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times) and the main game side gaming state shifts. Even if the game state on the main game side does not shift, the stay stage can be switched based on the passage of the change in the main game symbol (because the game state has changed a predetermined number of times since the start of the game). may be configured.

By configuring as described above, the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has two effects, which are the constant change promotion effect and the time-saving promotion effect, as productions that are executed during the jackpot and suggest the gaming state after the jackpot ends. By configuring the performance to be executed, the player pays attention to the results of two stages of performance: whether or not to shift to the probability-changing gaming state and whether to shift to the time-reducing gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

In the second embodiment, by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, a so-called ball-probability game configuration is adopted in which the game state can be shifted to a probability variable game state after the special game ends. The configuration for executing a promotion effect such as a form may be applied to other than the ball winning machine, for example, a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. May be applied to

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the probability fluctuation game state ends after the execution of symbol fluctuations a predetermined number of times, an example of a configuration is illustrated in which the number of time saving times is greater than the number of probability fluctuations, but such a game The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment will be referred to as modification example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 1850 (second change 1), that is, in step 1997, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout control process, step 1850 (second change 1) ), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of steps 1400(1) and (2) in FIG. 8 in the first modification from the second embodiment. . Changes from the second embodiment are step 1411-3 (second change 1), step 1439 (second change 1), step 1440 (second change 1), step 1441 (second change 1), step 1442 (Second Variation 1) and Step 1443 (Second Variation 1), that is, in Step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 2 and determines the stop symbols related to the main game symbols. After that, in step 1411-3 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency B flag is off. If Yes in step 1411-3 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1412. Note that if No in step 1411-3 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1500.

In addition, if it is determined in step 1426 that the CPUMC of the main control board M is fluctuating flag is off, in step 1439 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the fluctuation fixed flag (main game It is determined whether or not the flag (which remains on during the fixed fluctuation time from when the symbols are fixed and stopped until the next symbol fluctuation starts) is on. If Yes in step 1439 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1442 (second change 1), and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Further, in step 1434, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag, in step 1440 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation fixing time (in this example, 0 At step 1441 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixing flag, and at step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixing flag. ). Next, in step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the variable fixed time timer SH10t is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation fixing flag in step 1443 (second change 1), and proceeds to step 1436. On the other hand, if No in step 1442 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600). In this way, in the first modification from the second embodiment, a variable fixed time is provided, and all the time values are predetermined values (0.3 seconds in this example); The structure is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have multiple types of variable fixed time time values. The variable fixed time may be made different depending on whether it is the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, or the variable fixed time may be made different depending on a combination of these plurality of symbols.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 32 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1502 (second variation 1) and step 1506 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1502 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is The counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the first stage range (within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 which is the first stage in the limited frequency B state which has three stages). , 100≧G>60). If Yes in step 1502 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1504. Further, in the case of No in step 1502 (second change 1), in step 1506 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the second stage range. (within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 which is the second stage in the limited frequency B state having three stages, 59≧G>1). If Yes in step 1506 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1508. Further, in the case of No in step 1506 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1510.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) in FIG. 16 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1780-4 (second variation 1) and step 1782-1 (second variation 1) to step 1782-9 (second variation 1), that is, 1780-3 After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1780-4 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability change number counter MP51c to a predetermined value (in this example, 40) and proceeds to step 1780-5. In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in step 1780-8, in step 1782-1 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B counter MN52c- 2 is set to a predetermined value (100 in this example). Next, in step 1782-2 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1780-9.

In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in step 1781-6, in step 1782-6 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B counter MN52c- 2 is set to a predetermined value (100 in this example). Next, in step 1782-7 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-8. In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in step 1781-11, in step 1782-8 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B counter MN52c- 2 is set to a predetermined value (100 in this example). Next, in step 1782-9 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-12. In this way, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when transitioning to the time reduction gaming state, the state becomes limited frequency B state, and thereafter the selection tendency of the variable time changes to three stages, and the jackpot ends. If the game state is later shifted to the probability variable gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the jackpot ends → the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, and the state in which the variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 1 is 40 times → It is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, and the fluctuation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 2 59 times → It is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, and the limited frequency table 3 is referred to. The configuration is such that the state in which the fluctuation mode is determined by changing the state changes once. In this example, the main game symbol fluctuation time when referring to the limited frequency table 3 is configured so that only 5 seconds is selected, but this is not limited to this, and a long time such as 30 seconds is selected. It may be configured such that only the variation time is selected (particularly the symbol variation that results in a loss), and a performance exclusively for the time-saving final variation may be executed. In addition, if you move to the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state after the jackpot ends, the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state will change symbols 40 times, and the non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state will change 60 times. The number of variations in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is greater than the number of variations in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure is such that the number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the number of fluctuations in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are the same number of times (for example, 50 times). (This configuration of the probability variable number and the time saving number is applicable to all embodiments according to this example). In addition, as a configuration in which the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are completed by executing a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, the transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is implemented, (1) the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and After the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state ends, a jackpot is created in which the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are executed a predetermined number of times, and then transitioning to the probability-changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. (2) After the jackpot won in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time saving gaming state, after executing the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time saving gaming state a predetermined number of times, the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time saving gaming state will be resumed. It may be configured to provide a jackpot that causes a transition to a state. In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, regardless of the gaming state in which the jackpot was won or the jackpot symbol, if a ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the stay stage after the jackpot ends is the "space stage", and if no ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot, the stay stage after the jackpot may be set as the "evening stage".In that case, if it is the "space stage", the limited frequency B state , for the "evening stage", the limited frequency state may be set to the limited frequency A state (or the limited frequency state, such as the limited frequency C state, in which the selection tendency of the variable time can differ depending on the number of reservations).

Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of external signal output processing related to the subroutine of step 1850 (second variation 1) in FIG. 31 according to modification example 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 based on the confirmed result, and selects the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed result of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the CPU 100, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the first modification from the second embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal board G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information regarding prize ball payout, information regarding winning and symbol stopping, and current gaming status (normal gaming status, Terminal for outputting gaming status information (specific gaming status, special gaming status, etc.), error information for outputting various error information detected by an open detection sensor, etc. when the door is open output terminals, etc.) are provided. As described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness, so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the first modification from the second embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as the output terminal for the payout-related information, which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is multiple types of information. It is being Note that the output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M, for example, jackpot output terminals that output signals during the jackpot (there are multiple jackpots depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when a winning ball enters the starting opening, a ball shortage in the prize ball tank KT. Game-related information that is important information for the gaming hall operator, such as the terminal for outputting when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the ball is out, and the terminal for outputting the number of special symbols confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, by using one output terminal as the output terminal for the payout-related information, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game-related information.

In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to briefly explain the information transmission method of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G. , and the external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always electrically connected. It's not that I'm doing it. That is, the electrical signals (binary logic signals whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminals of the external relay terminal board G are connected to the relay. After the signal is once replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on/off) by the section, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force closes the contact portion G2, thereby establishing electrical continuity between the output terminal and the hall computer HC. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the Hall computer HC are no longer electrically connected. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the period of conduction, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G. With this configuration, it is possible to physically ensure one-way communication from the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and the ball payout control board KH. This prevents illegal operations (so-called remote control operations) in which the prize ball payout control board KH is manipulated illegally. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing misbehavior, but the invention is not limited to this. One-way communication is also possible using a photosensor with a light receiving section (for example, light from a light emitting section connected to the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH is connected to a light receiving section connected to the hall computer HC). I would like to add that it is possible to receive the signal by reading it with the

However, since it is configured to be replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on/off), one signal on the external relay terminal board G is sent from the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC. It is difficult to transmit complex information using input/output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of special symbols confirmed, It is customary to configure the system so that only information indicating that "one variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board G in modification example 1 from the second embodiment will be described. Please note that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification mode, measures to be taken in case of duplication, etc.) are just examples, and can be changed as long as they do not significantly deviate from the concept of this example. I'll keep it.

Signal number: 1
Signal type: Outline of symbol fluctuation signal: Targets a part of symbol fluctuations (for example, symbol fluctuations on the first main game side) that trigger the opening of the big winning hole (attacker), and outputs the number of symbol fluctuations. The signal is; When the fluctuating display of the first main game symbol is completed (for example, when the fluctuating flag is turned from on to off in step 1424 in the first main game symbol display process) {*Please note that the fluctuating display is After the end, the output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or if it starts, or if it is during the period).
1 Signal configuration: [Output timing] Timing when the fluctuating display of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol ends {After the fluctuating display ends, when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts) (if it is during the period) may be used as the output timing}
[Output period] Outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds Overlap of output periods: [Possibility of overlap] There is no overlap of the same signal, but other signals (such as signal number 2 and signal number 3 described later) Jackpot type signals, security type signals with signal number 4, etc.) may overlap (in addition, the same applies to signals other than signal number 1 where the possibility of duplication is listed as ``none''). (can overlap with other signals)
None Note: It is preferable that the output period is configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period of the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. In addition, the output period of the signal is the same 0.5 seconds for the signal related to the first main game symbol and the signal related to the second main game symbol, and the time value is different from the variable fixed time of 0.3 seconds. It becomes.

Signal number: 2
Signal type: Overview of jackpot-related signals: Outputs that the jackpot is in progress and is in the time-reduced game state Composition of the 1 signal: [Output timing] Start timing of special game [Output period] Special game is not being executed, and Until it enters a non-time saving gaming state (remains on from the stop of the jackpot symbol to the start of the jackpot in the time saving gaming state)
Overlap of output periods: [Possibility of overlapping] None Notes: Even when transitioning from a probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state to a non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, output may continue. In addition, it is not output in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state.

Signal number: 3
Signal type: Outline of jackpot signal: Outputs that jackpot is in progress 1 Signal configuration: [Output timing] Start timing of special game [Output period] Until end timing of special game (Jackpot start demo time and jackpot end demo time) including)
Overlap of output periods: [Possibility of overlap] None Note: The output period between the jackpot start demo time and the jackpot end demo time is longer than if you won the jackpot in the time-shortened gaming state than if you won the jackpot in the non-time-shortened gaming state. It will take less time if you win

Signal number: 4
Signal type: Overview of security signal: Outputs that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine and that detectable fraudulent activity is occurring on the gaming machine.As an example of fraudulent activity, is a normal ball that has detected a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the big winning hole (attacker) during a period other than the period when the big winning hole (attacker) can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated). During the period when the electric accessory cannot be released, more than a predetermined number (5) of balls entering the normal electric accessory are detected (unauthorized winning).
1 Signal configuration: [Output timing] At any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed and when the fraudulent winning is detected [Output period] Output an on signal for the first period (30 seconds) of the output period. Duplicate: [Possibility of duplication] Yes [Processing when there is a possibility of duplication] All output periods are overlapped, and the output of the on signal is maintained until all output periods expire. Note: Output after fraudulent winnings and RAM clearing The period may be different

Signal number: 5
Signal type: Outline of winning detection system signal: The composition of one signal that targets all starting holes related to symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning hole (attacker) and outputs the number of balls entering each starting hole: [Output timing] When the switch for detecting the entry of a ball into the first main game starting port detects one entering ball, and when the switch for detecting the entry of a ball into the second main game starting port When an incoming ball is detected [Output period] Outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds, then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds Overlap of output periods: [Possibility of overlap] Yes [Overlap] [Process when obtaining] Wait for the next output until the output period of the current one signal expires Note: Even in the final variation of the time reduction gaming state (symbol variation where the time reduction number counter MP52c value = 1), multiple can be output twice. Further, when an illegal entry of a ball into the second main game starting port is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied using the entry of the ball as a trigger.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, in which the probability fluctuation game state ends after the execution of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, the number of time saving times is greater than the number of probability fluctuations. Even in such a configuration, when outputting information regarding game progress and error occurrence information to the outside (for example, outputting to the hall computer HC), it is necessary to output appropriate information to the outside according to the characteristics of the gaming machine. will be possible.

In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the first main game symbol and The output period of the above-mentioned symbol confirmation signal with signal number 1 related to the second main game symbol is basically the same time value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the variable fixed time is also basically the same time. value (for example, 0.3 seconds), but only in the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state (the final fluctuation of the non-probability gaming state and the time reduction gaming state), the output period and fluctuation of the symbol confirmation signal with signal number 1 If the fixed time is long (for both the symbol fluctuation related to the first main game symbol and the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol) (for example, the fixed time of variation is 0.5 seconds, and the symbol with signal number 2 is The configuration may be such that the output period of the confirmation signal is 0.7 seconds). Further, although the fixed variation time becomes long only in the final variation of the time reduction gaming state, the output period of the symbol confirmation signal with signal number 1 may be the same as the previous symbol variation execution time.

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, an example of a configuration is exemplified in which, in a gaming machine in which the probability variation game state ends after the execution of symbol variations a predetermined number of times, the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability variations, but such a game The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment will be referred to as modification example 2 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 4 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the first modification example of the second embodiment is step 1326 (second modification 2), that is, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the entry of the ball into the first main game starting port A10. If it is determined that it has been detected, in step 1326 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the first main game starting opening ball entry command (a command to the sub control board S side, A command related to the detection of the ball entering the starting port A10 is set, and the process moves to step 1304. In addition, in the second modification example from the second embodiment, when a ball entering the first main game starting port A10 is detected, a command for entering the first starting port is sent to the sub control board S side. However, the invention is not limited to this, and only when a ball entering the first main game starting port A10 is detected in the time reduction gaming state, the first starting port entry command is sent to the sub control board S side. may be configured.

Next, FIG. 38 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 8 in the second modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of game symbol display processing). The changes from the second embodiment are step 1411-3 (second variation 1), step 1650 (second variation 2), step 1435 (second variation 2), step 1441 (second variation 1), step 1442 (2nd variation 1), step 1443 (2nd variation 1), and step 1439 (2nd variation 1), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol regarding the main game symbol in step 1410. , In step 1411-3 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency B flag is off. If Yes in step 1411-3 (second change 1), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines and temporarily stores the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols, or in step 1500 After the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process, in step 1650 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the fluctuation fixed time determination process to be described later, and in step 1418 to move to. In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag in step 1434, in step 1435 (second change 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the process of step 1650 (second change 2). The process starts by setting the variable fixed time determined in step 1441 in the variable fixed time timer SH10t. Next, in step 1441 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixing flag, and proceeds to step 1442 (second change 1). Further, in step 1439 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation fixing flag is on. If Yes in step 1439 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1442 (second change 1). Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1439 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the variable fixed time timer SH10t value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixing flag in step 1443 (second change 1), and proceeds to step 1436. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1442 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process related to the subroutine of step 1650 (second variation 2) in FIG. 38 in modification example 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the symbol variation is the final variation in the time reduction gaming state (100th variation after the end of the jackpot). If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the fluctuation fixing time to a long time (longer than the fluctuation fixing time related to step 1656, in this example, 0.5 seconds). It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1418). Further, if No in step 1652, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the fluctuation fixing time to a short time (shorter than the fluctuation fixing time related to step 1654, in this example, 0.3 seconds). ) and moves to the next process (the process of step 1418). In addition, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal related to the number of symbol fluctuations of signal number 1 is 0.7 seconds when the fluctuation fixing time is long, and when the fluctuation fixing time is short. 0.5 seconds, and when the fixed fluctuation time is long, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal related to the number of symbol fluctuations of signal number 1 is also configured to be long.

Next, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in modification example 2 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2200 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2600, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stay stage determination process, step 2200 (second variation 2) is performed. In 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a right-hand hitting instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the right-handed hitting instruction display control process related to the subroutine of step 2200 (second variation 2) in FIG. 40 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a time-reduction gaming state. If YES in step 2202, the process moves to step 2204. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off, in other words, whether or not a special game is being executed. If No in step 2203, the process moves to step 2204.

Next, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the second right-hitting instruction display on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2206, CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the first main game starting opening ball entry command from the main control board M side {the command set in step 1326 (second change 2), and the first It is determined whether or not a command indicating that a ball has entered the main game starting port A10 has been received. If Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the first right-hitting instruction display (for example, to display it for 5 seconds and then erase it) on the effect display device SG. , the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2999).

Further, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2203, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game in progress flag is off, in other words, whether or not a special game is being executed. If No in step 2203, the process moves to step 2204. Note that during execution of the special game, it may be configured to display a right-handed hitting instruction display different from the first right-handed hitting instruction display and the second right-handed hitting instruction display; for example, at least when a predetermined round of the special game is executed, Displaying a fourth right-handed instruction display having a relatively small display area as the right-handed instruction display to be displayed, and satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, detecting a ball entering the first main game starting opening) during the special game. Accordingly, a third right-hand hitting instruction display having a relatively large display area may be displayed. Note that the third right-handed hitting instruction display and the fourth right-handed hitting instruction display may both be configured to be displayable at the same time. It should be noted that the configuration may also be configured so that an audio notification from the speaker D24 can also be output (for example, output "Right hit!!") at the timing when the display of the first right hit instruction display or the third right hit instruction display is started. good.

Further, in the case of Yes in step 2203, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the right-hitting instruction display displayed from the effect display device SG (the first right-hitting instruction display and the second right-hitting instruction display). If the right-hand hit instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed) command is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 2206, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). With this configuration, the second right-hitting instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG as the right-handed hitting instruction display during the execution of the special game and in the time-reduction game state (a state in which the player should execute the right-handed hitting). In addition, if the player executes a left-handed batting and the ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 is detected despite the second right-handed batting instruction display being displayed, the first A right-handed game instruction display can also be displayed on the performance display device SG to encourage the player to play the game with the right-handed game.

Next, the lower part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed hitting instruction display. First, the left side shows a first right-hitting instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG, and the right side shows a second right-hitting instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG. The first right-handed hitting instruction display has a relatively larger display area than the second right-handed hitting instruction display, making it a more conspicuous display mode. With this configuration, even though the right-handed batting instruction display (second right-handed batting instruction display) instructs players to bat right-handed, it is clearer for players who play left-handed. can be instructed to bat right-handed. Here, right-handed hitting means hitting the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball to a relatively strong strength so that the game ball flows down the right side of the gaming area D30, and can also be referred to as rubber hitting. be. Further, left-handed hitting means to shoot the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball to a relatively weak strength so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30. Note that the configuration for encouraging the player to play the game by hitting the ball right-handed is not limited to this, but if it is determined that the player is hitting the ball left-handed for a predetermined period of time (i.e., the player is not allowed to play the game by hitting the ball left-handed). A first right-handed batting instruction display may be displayed for detecting the number of balls entering the ball, etc., or a sensor capable of detecting game balls flowing down the gaming area D30 may be provided, and the sensor executes left-handed batting. If this is detected, the first right-hand hitting instruction display may be displayed. Furthermore, when the player is playing left-handed, the display is not limited to displaying the first right-handed hitting instruction display, and the speaker D24 may be configured to generate a warning sound. Further, the first right-handed hitting instruction display may be configured to disappear after being displayed for a predetermined time, or may be configured to be deleted when it is determined that right-handed hitting is being performed for a predetermined time or more.

Note that the configuration related to the right-handed hitting instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment is as follows.
(1) When a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 one second before the final fluctuation stops in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state, and the first right-hitting instruction display is displayed. is configured so that the first right-hitting instruction display can be continuously displayed even during symbol variation in the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, which is the next variation, but in the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction If the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 one second before the final fluctuation stops in the shortened gaming state, and the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, the next fluctuation, which is the non-probability At the start of symbol variation in the variable gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state, the first right hit instruction display will be erased. That is, the first right-hitting instruction display can be displayed from the final variation to the subsequent symbol variations in the probability-changing gaming state and the time-reduction game state, but the first right-hitting instruction display can be displayed in the non-probability-changing gaming state and the time-reducing game. It is not displayed from the final change in state to subsequent symbol changes. Note that this configuration may be applied only to symbol variations in which the final variation in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the final variation in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state result in a loss.
(2) The display modes of the first right-hand hitting instruction display and the second right-hand hitting instruction display are the same in the probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state and the non-probability-variable game state and time-reduced game state; A stay stage (performance tendency) and/or a specific performance (for example, a performance related to the end of the time reduction gaming state) in a probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state and a non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state. Whether or not it is executed may be different.
(3) The second right hit instruction display continues to be displayed on the performance display device SG in the probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, and The hitting instruction display alone can be displayed alone, or it can be displayed overlappingly with the first hitting instruction display (the first hitting instruction display and the second hitting right instruction display can be displayed simultaneously). In such a case, the first right-handed hitting instruction display may be configured to have a higher display priority (displayed in front) than the second right-handed hitting instruction display. Further, it may be configured such that only the first right-hand hitting instruction display cannot be displayed alone. Further, the configuration may be configured to be applied at least during the display of a predetermined decorative pattern in a variable manner (for example, a pattern variation that does not result in a reach related to a loss).

Further, the configuration related to the right-handed hitting instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment may be configured as follows.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {state in which limited frequency table 1 is referred to (limited frequency B1) ) → state of referring to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B2) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)}, the variation stop 1 of the final variation at limited frequency B2 If the first right-hitting instruction display is displayed due to a game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 seconds ago, the symbol variation at limited frequency B3 (limited frequency B3 is only 1 variation) is displayed. The first right-hitting instruction display is configured so that it can be displayed continuously even in the case of the final variation at the limited frequency B3 (indicating the one variation in probability variation). 1 second before the fluctuation stops (this is the final fluctuation in the time reduction gaming state, and if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one fluctuation, it indicates the one fluctuation), the first main game starting port A10 When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the ball, the symbol variation in the next variation, non-probability variation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (not limited frequency state). At the start point, the first right-handed hitting instruction display will be erased. That is, the first right-handed instruction display can be displayed from the final variation at limited frequency B2 to subsequent symbol variations (the first right-handed instruction display may be displayed from the final variation at limited frequency B1 to subsequent symbol variations. However, the first right-handed instruction display is based on the final variation in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation). It is not displayed over subsequent symbol changes.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {state in which limited frequency table 1 is referenced (limited frequency B1 and ) → state of referring to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B2) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)}, the final fluctuation at limited frequency B2 stops changing. If the first right-handed instruction display is displayed because a game ball entered the first main game starting port A10 one second ago, the symbol variation in limited frequency B3 (limited frequency B3 is only one variation) The first right-handed hitting instruction display is configured so that it can be displayed continuously even during the final variation (indicating the one variation when the final variation is finished), but the final variation at the limited frequency B3 (non-stochastic variation). 1 second before the fluctuation stops, the first main game starts. When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the mouth A10, the symbol in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (not the limited frequency state) which is the next fluctuation. At the start of the variation, the first right-handed hitting instruction display will be erased. That is, the first right-handed instruction display can be displayed from the final variation at limited frequency B2 to subsequent symbol variations (the first right-handed instruction display may be displayed from the final variation at limited frequency B1 to subsequent symbol variations. However, the first right-handed instruction display is based on the final variation in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation). It is not displayed over subsequent symbol changes.
(3) During the fluctuation of a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a fluctuation that does not result in a reach related to a loss), the first right-hitting instruction display and the second right-hitting instruction display are displayed in front of the display of the decorative pattern. High priority (display priority)}. For example, the display layers on the production display device SG include a first layer, a second layer, and a third layer from the front, the first layer being the frontmost layer, the third layer being the backmost layer, and the image to be displayed. If the images overlap, the decorative design will be displayed on the third layer, and the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display will be The display may be configured to be displayed on the first layer or the second layer.
(4) The first right-hitting instruction display may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. The second right-hitting instruction display may also be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. The first right-hitting instruction display may be displayed at a position that overlaps with a specific preview performance such as a step-up performance (a performance similar to the one described above). The second right-hitting instruction display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with a specific preview performance such as a step-up performance. The first right-hand hit instruction display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the pending display image. The second right-handed hitting instruction display is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the hold display image.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment in which the probability fluctuating gaming state ends after the execution of symbol fluctuations a predetermined number of times, an appropriate right control can be performed based on the transition of the gaming state. A playing instruction display can be displayed, and the gaming machine can be made user-friendly.

(Example 3 of modification from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, an example of a configuration is exemplified in which, in a gaming machine in which the probability variation game state ends after the execution of symbol variations a predetermined number of times, the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability variations, but such a game The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment will be referred to as modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) in FIG. 4 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1321, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening ball entering information has been received from the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s. In the case of Yes in step 1321, in step 1322, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly on the first main game side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). If Yes in step 1322, in step 1323, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this example, as the first main game content determining random number, a win/fail lottery random number for determining win/fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. We have obtained three random numbers for the random variation lottery random number. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are successively acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1325, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the special game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1325, in step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1327, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the win/fail result and the stopped symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the newly generated suspension result and stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting it to the sub-main control unit SM. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1329.

Next, in step 1329, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups (non-time saving variation mode group and time saving variation mode determination random number) related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number). Aspect group) is predetermined (see main game table 3 in FIG. 43 for the variable mode random number delimiter information and variable mode group), and the process moves to step 1330. In addition, in the third modification from the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). It should be noted that if the result in step 1325 or step 1326 is No, the process also moves to step 1330. Next, in step 1330, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a hold generation command for the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub-main control board M. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1331. In addition, in the case where the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side as in modification example 3 from the second embodiment, even if the sub-control board S side performs an effect that suggests a jackpot. In cases where such a configuration is adopted, it is desirable to have a configuration that can notify the player of the stopping symbols of the main game symbol that will result in a jackpot (the system will only stop when the stopping symbol of the main gaming symbol results in a jackpot). (notify the design). Also, if No in step 1321 or step 1322, the process moves to step 1331. Although the first main game content determining random number is temporarily stored in step 1324, the process regarding the first main game content determining random number will be described in detail as follows: (1) Entering the ball into the first main game starting port A10. As a trigger, a first main game content determining random number is obtained and the random number is stored in a register. (2) Store the first main game content determining random number stored in the register in the RAM of the main control board M, and start changing the main game symbols based on the first main game content determining random number stored in the register. A pre-read lottery will be held in front of the event. (3) At the start of variation of main game symbols, the first main game content determining random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M is stored in a register, and based on the first main game content determining random number stored in the register (The validity determination may be executed based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M.) In addition, in the case where the second main game side is also configured to perform a pre-read lottery, the second main game content determining random number may also be configured to perform similar processing.

In this way, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is obtained (or when a hold occurs), the variation mode random number is It is configured to determine delimiter information and variation mode groups.

It should be noted that the main game content determining random number information, win/fail random number delimiter information, fluctuation mode random number delimiter information, and fluctuation mode group information may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side at the timing when a hold occurs. , the information sent to the sub-control board S side is not limited to this, but includes information related to the stopped symbols of the main game symbols, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbols that will be a jackpot (special information related to the main game symbols scheduled to be stopped), number of rounds of the game, etc.), the number of reservations immediately after winning a prize (even if it is only the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, both the first main game side and the second main game side) {The winning/losing random number delimiter information refers to the respective gaming states on the first main game side (second main game side) and the random number values. (or random number range) and the winning/losing lottery results are grouped together. This can be grouped into groups such as a win in a probability-changing gaming state or a non-probability-changing gaming state, a win in a probability-changing gaming state, but a loss in a non-probability-changing gaming state. .

Next, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 1331, in step 1332, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly on the second main game side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1332, in step 1333, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers are acquired, which are a win/fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variable mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game symbol determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game) ) are set to the same value. Next, in step 1334, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1335, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1335, in step 1337, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the win/fail result and the stopped symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1338, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the newly generated suspension result and stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting it to the sub-main control unit SM. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1339, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups (non-time saving variation mode group and time saving variation mode determination random number) related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number). (Refer to main game table 3 in FIG. 44 for the variable mode random number delimiter information and variable mode groups.), and the process moves to step 1340.

Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1335, in step 1336, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game time saving flag is off. If YES in step 1336, the process moves to step 1340. On the other hand, if No in step 1336, the process moves to step 1337.

Next, in step 1340, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a hold generation command for the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub-main control board M. The control command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1331 or step 1332, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400).

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value is based on the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol and the state of the main game time shortening flag. is configured so that it can be determined. For example, with respect to a certain random number value, if the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and if the main game time-saving flag is on (time-saving game state) is configured such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is just an example, and there is no limitation to the type of variation mode (variation time), selection rate, etc. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) is relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side When the system is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to execute, the second main game side is likely to be held by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player). Since the purpose is to create a situation in which the game is played, it is particularly effective in cases where it is not possible to distinguish between the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side. In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and fluctuation mode groups are provided in all situations (gaming states, etc.), but the information is not limited to this, and the situation to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side In the case where the number is limited, the variation pattern random number delimiter information and the variation pattern group may be provided only in that case. For example, on the first main game side, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group are not provided in the time reduction gaming state, and on the second main game side, the variation mode random number The configuration may be such that the delimiter information and the variation mode group are not provided. In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the pre-read lottery is not executed for the hold on the second main game side, and in the time reduction game state, the pre-read lottery is not executed for the hold on the first main game side. may be configured. In such a case, it is preferable to configure so that the hold on the second main game side is used up with priority over the hold on the first main game side. Furthermore, the table referred to in "When losing, when playing time-reduced game" in FIG. (see table of contents). Furthermore, the table referred to in "When losing, when playing non-time saving games" in FIG. (see table of contents)

Further, as shown in this example, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode group is determined by the random number for variation mode determination. The variation mode group is determined to be Group 1 (Group A) if the main game symbol variation time is short, and Group 3 (Group C) if the main game symbol variation time is long. (If it does not fall under any group, it will be group 2 (group B)). In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, only the hold determined to be group C or group B is configured so that it can become a hold (trigger hold) that becomes an opportunity to generate a prefetch effect.

In addition, in steps 1324 and 1334, the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board M. When storing random numbers, secure a dedicated storage area, and store only the information related to the "main game content determining random number" in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determining random number (various It is preferable to configure the system so that other information such as timer values is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same byte, the information related to the main game content determining random number is rewritten due to noise etc.). (to prevent this from happening). In addition, regarding the winning lottery random number, changes in the gaming state (changes in the gaming state related to the pending that have already been recorded) between the time the winning lottery random number is acquired and the winning lottery based on the winning lottery random number are executed. In addition to changes, there is a possibility that the gaming state may change due to a new hold, so it is impossible to predict the gaming state at the time of the winning/losing drawing related to the random number. The lottery random number is stored until it is executed. In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM regarding the reservation information can be sent only when the reservation related to the first main game occurs in the non-time reduction gaming state. , in the time-reduced game state, it is configured so that it can be sent only when a hold related to the second main game occurs, but no matter which game state it is, there is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game. The sub-main control unit SM may be configured to be able to transmit the command regardless of whether the command is used or not, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. You may. In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, when the first main game content determination random number is stored, a new It is configured to transmit information regarding the validity result regarding the hold, the stopped symbols, and the variation mode group to the sub-control board S side. In addition, when the second main game content determination random number is stored, if a special game is being executed or the time reduction game state is in progress, the results regarding new suspension, stopped symbols, and variation mode groups can be stored. It is configured to transmit information to the sub control board S side. In addition, it may be configured to provide a small win, and in such a case, when the small win is executed, a new suspension will be applied when the first main game content determination random number is obtained. Information regarding the winning/failure results, stopped symbols, and variation mode groups is not sent to the sub-control board S side. Information regarding the winning/failing results, stopping symbols, and variation mode groups related to the new hold when the second main game content determination random number is obtained. is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and if a small hit has not been executed, the new success/failure result, stop symbol, and fluctuation mode related to the new hold when the first main game content determination random number is obtained. Information regarding the group is sent to the sub-control board S side, and information regarding the new hold result, stopped symbol, and variation mode group when the second main game content determination random number is obtained is sent to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured not to send it.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 19 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a command related to the occurrence of a new reservation (reservation information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. Determine. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing holding counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1” is added. Next, in step 2106 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S transfers the command related to the new suspension result and stopped symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the suspension information temporary storage area ( It is temporarily stored in an area (area for temporarily storing information related to suspension on the sub-control board S side). Next, in step 2107 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the hold information (particularly, the variation mode group, the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , etc.) are temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. In addition, if the information related to the win/fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information is not transmitted from the main control board M side, step 2106 (second variation 3) or step 2107 (second variation 3) is not transmitted. In change 2 and 3), the information will not be temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2117 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the new hold is the hold on the second main game side. If Yes in Step 2117 (Second Variation 3), then in Step 2150 (Second Variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize-winning pre-read determination process, which will be described later, and in Step 2118 (Second Variation 3), ). Next, in step 2118 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not information indicating that the new hold is triggered hold is added, in other words, the new hold is triggered hold. Determine whether it is on hold. In the third modification from the second embodiment, information indicating that the pending lottery winning lottery is triggered is added to the pending lottery, and this information is added in the process of step 2170. If Yes in Step 2118 (Second Variation 3), in Step 2250 (Second Variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-read effect content determination process, which will be described later, and in Step 2116 (Second Variation 3) ). Furthermore, if the result in step 2117 (second change 3) is No (if the new hold is a hold on the second main game side) or if the result in step 2118 (second change 3) is No, step 2116 ( Move on to the second variation 3).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If YES in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts "1" from the counter value of the drawing pending counter in step 2110. Next, in step 2112 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends pending information related to the symbol variation (in particular, win/fail results, stopped symbol information, variation mode group, and variation mode random number delimiter information). The drawing pending information is deleted from the temporary storage area and the remaining pending information is shifted. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and in step 2116 (
Move on to the second variation 3). Note that even if the answer in step 2108 is No, the process moves to step 2116 (second variation 3).

Next, in step 2116 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the drawing pending counter value on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first pending display section SG12, the second pending display section SG13). The same number of pending display images are displayed on the production display device SG in the determined pending display mode (if the pending display mode does not change, the pending display mode becomes white), and the next process (step 2300) is performed. processing). Note that the display of the hold on the side of the sub-control board S may be by displaying a hold image object on the effect display device SG, or by lighting up an LED corresponding to the hold.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the pre-read determination process at the time of winning, which is related to the subroutine of step 2150 (second variation 3) in FIG. 45 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a time-reduction game. In this way, in the third modification from the second embodiment, since it is configured such that the pre-read lottery at the time of winning a prize can be executed in the time-reduced gaming state, it is possible to perform the pre-read lottery when winning a prize in the time-reduced gaming state. It is possible to execute a look-ahead lottery in a gaming state and a time-reduced game state, that is, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect spanning from a probability-changing game state and a time-reducing game state to a non-probability-changing game state and a time-reducing game state. There is. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2155 CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the new hold is a hold that will be consumed by the symbol change one time before the final change in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving final change). In other words, it is determined whether the pre-read performance is completed by the end of the previous symbol variation in the time reduction game state. That is, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the look-ahead performance is not executed in the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (time-saving final variation). In the case of Yes in step 2155, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is no reservation that will become a jackpot among the reservations that will be exhausted before the new reservation. If YES in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not all the reservations that will be cleared before the new reservation is cleared are group A reservations. If YES in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the new reservation is a group C reservation in step 2162. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2163, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning lottery with a predetermined probability of winning (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2168. Note that the predetermined probability A does not need to be 1/3, and by changing the predetermined probability A, it is possible to adjust the degree of expectation of a jackpot due to symbol fluctuations that trigger the execution of the look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the new reservation is a group B reservation in step 2164. If Yes in step 2164, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning lottery with a predetermined probability B (lower probability than the predetermined probability A described above, for example, 1/40). Then, the process moves to step 2168. In this way, the configuration is such that the probability of winning is relatively higher when the new reservation is from group C than when it is from group B. In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, if a newly generated hold is a group A hold, a pre-read lottery at the time of winning is not executed for the newly generated hold. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning lottery may be executed even for the pending group A, and in that case, the probability of winning the winning lottery is "Group C>Group B> Group A" may be configured. On the other hand, if No in step 2164 (that is, if the new reservation is the reservation of group A), the next process {the process of step 2118 (second variation 3)} is performed without executing the pre-read lottery at the time of winning. to move to.

Next, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the player has won the winning lottery performed in step 2163 or step 2166. If Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds information indicating that the new hold is "trigger hold" to the hold information of the new hold that won the winning pre-read lottery that was executed, and It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the control board S, and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2118 (second change 3)}. Note that even in the case of No in step 2154, step 2155, step 2156, step 2158, or step 2168, the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2118 (second variation 3)}. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning, and is a hold that triggers a look-ahead effect, which will be described later.

Note that in this example, the configuration regarding pre-reading may be configured as follows.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {state in which limited frequency table 1 is referred to (limited frequency B1) ) → state of referring to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B2) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)}, the next symbol is changed from the last change in limited frequency B2. The look-ahead effect can be executed over the first symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 that is variation (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation) (limited frequency B2 In a certain situation, a look-ahead lottery may be executed for a hold that is scheduled to be expired after transitioning to limited frequency B3), and the final fluctuation in limited frequency B3 (the final fluctuation in probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction gaming state). If the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates that one variation) to the next symbol variation in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state. The look-ahead performance is not executed over the period of time (the look-ahead lottery is not executed for the reservation that is scheduled to be consumed after transitioning to the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state in the limited frequency B3 situation). In other words, in the final variation at the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect can be executed over the subsequent symbol variations, but the final variation at the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, the prefetch effect of the one variation) ), the look-ahead effect is not executed over subsequent symbol changes.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {state in which limited frequency table 1 is referenced (limited frequency B1 and → state of referring to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B2) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)}, the next change from the last change in limited frequency B2 The look-ahead effect can be executed over the first symbol variation in the limited frequency B3, which is a symbol variation (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation) (limited frequency In a situation where B2 is present, a look-ahead lottery can be executed for reservations that are scheduled to be completed after transitioning to limited frequency B3), and a final variation in limited frequency B3 (in a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state). This is the final variation, and if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates that one variation) to the next symbol variation in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state. A look-ahead performance is not executed throughout the fluctuation (a look-ahead lottery is not executed for a reservation that is scheduled to be consumed after transitioning to a non-probability fluctuation game state and a non-time reduction game state in a situation where the limited frequency is B3). In other words, in the final variation at the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect can be executed over the subsequent symbol variations, but the final variation at the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, the prefetch effect of the one variation) ), the look-ahead effect is not executed over subsequent symbol changes.

In this way, in the third modification from the second embodiment, in the case of the time reduction gaming state, only the suspension related to the second main game can be the trigger suspension related to the look-ahead effect. This is just one example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a hold related to the first main game that occurs during a non-time reduction gaming state may also be set as a trigger hold. In addition, if the reservation that is extinguished before the newly generated reservation is not a reservation that will result in a jackpot, and all of the reservations are from group A, a pre-read lottery is executed at the time of winning a prize. Without limitation, even if there is a reservation that will be a jackpot among reservations that will be used up before a newly generated reservation, a pre-emptive lottery at the time of winning may be executed, and in that case, the profit for the player may be relatively small. In the case of a low jackpot (for example, an 8R jackpot, where the gaming state after the special game ends is a non-probability fluctuating gaming state), or a new pending jackpot that occurs earlier than the previous jackpot, If the jackpot is a jackpot with a relatively high profit (such as a large number of rounds executed), a pre-read lottery may be executed at the time of winning. In addition, in this example, the configuration is such that the pre-read lottery at the time of winning is executed only for the reservations of Group B and Group C, but it may be configured to be executed for all groups. In that case, the winning probability of the pre-read lottery at the time of winning of group A may be configured to be the lowest probability (for example, 1/80). Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a pre-read lottery at the time of winning if there is no "trigger hold" in the hold that is to be completed before the new hold.

In addition, in the third modification from the second embodiment, only the pre-read lottery at the time of winning a prize is executed as the pre-read lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be configured such that the pre-read lottery can be executed at different timings. Specifically, for example, it may be configured so that the pre-read lottery (pre-read lottery when variation stops) can be performed again when the symbol fluctuation stops for the pending group C that did not win the pre-read lottery when winning a prize. good.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second variation 3) in FIG. 45 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the pre-read effect type determination table and determines the pre-read effect type by lottery. Here, the upper right part of the figure is an example of a look-ahead performance type determination table, and the look-ahead performance in the third modification from the second embodiment is divided into three performance types: performance type A, performance type B, and performance type C. The prefetch effect to be executed is determined by the contents of the table. Although each performance type is configured to be drawn equally, the selection rate of the performance type is not limited to this. may be configured to change (if the expectation level of jackpot is high, performance type C is more likely to be selected, etc.).

Next, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S pre-determines whether the trigger is pending or not, based on the gaming state and the pending information (random number of winning/disappointing lottery numbers, etc.). Next, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold that triggers the pre-read performance is the hold that will result in a jackpot, based on the preliminary determination result. If Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the table for jackpot in the reservation display mode determination table and selects a pending display mode for trigger pending based on the pre-read effect type determined. Then, the process moves to step 2268. On the other hand, if No in step 2256, in other words, if the trigger hold is a hold that will result in a loss, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the failure in the hold display mode determination table based on the determined look-ahead effect type. The hold display mode of the trigger hold is determined by lottery with reference to the time table, and the process moves to step 2268.

Here, the lower right part of the figure is an example of a hold display mode determination table, and in modification example 3 of the second embodiment, the hold display mode is determined by random numbers. Further, when there is no change in reservation, the reservation display mode is displayed in white regardless of the random value. It should be noted that the rainbow color is configured to be selected only when pending a jackpot.

Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the determined prefetch effect type is a prefetch effect type that executes a background effect (in this example, effect type B and effect type C). do. If Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the sub control board S
The CPUSC turns on the background effect execution flag and moves to the next process {the process of step 2116 (second change 3)}. Note that even in the case of No in step 2268, the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2116 (second variation 3)}. It should be noted that the structure may be such that the holding change effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery until the end of the variation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With this configuration, for example, if the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is "blue", The display mode of the hold that changes in the second hold change performance is set to be "green" or "red", that is, the display mode of the hold that changes with the high expectation of jackpot changes every time the hold change performance is executed. It is desirable to configure the system so that the player's rank increases (in order not to spoil the expectations of the players). In addition, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, a mode of effect that does not involve a change in the hold display may be provided. For example, the hold trembles when the change starts (or when the hold expires). There may be a presentation mode in which a presentation occurs and the pending display does not change (so-called false pattern), and a presentation mode in which the pending display change is performed thereafter.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 19 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2350 (second variation 3), that is, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative pattern, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S After temporarily storing it in the RAM area, in step 2350 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a production content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2308.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the production content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 3) in FIG. 48 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the background effect execution flag (a flag that is turned on when the background effect becomes a background exclusively for prefetching as a prefetch effect) is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether there is no trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358 CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the final change in the time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2358, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the presentation content to the final variation-dedicated presentation in the time-reduced gaming state {the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state (jackpot) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. In the 100th variation after the end), it is determined that a special effect limited to that one variation is executed, and the process moves to step 2366. Next, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the "background for non-prefetching" as the background effect during the change (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control board (transmitted to the SS side) and moves to the next process (step 2308 process). Here, the "background for non-prefetching" refers to a case where a prefetching effect is not being executed, or a case where a prefetching effect is being executed but "no background effect" is determined by lottery in step 2252 (i.e. This is a background effect displayed when effect type A is determined as the prefetch effect type. In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, when the pre-read lottery is won, the background effect and/or the pending change effect are executed as the pre-read effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , If you win the look-ahead lottery, as a look-ahead effect, the stop display mode of the decorative pattern will be changed to the chance number (the decorative pattern will stop at the number indicating a loss, but the stop display mode will be changed to all three rows of odd numbers, all even numbers, etc.) This is a performance that informs you that there may be a trigger hold among the unexploited holds.For example, an odd number of chances indicates the possibility of a trigger hold or the jackpot expectation of a trigger hold. may be configured such that it can be stopped at a relatively high point. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the system is configured so that the chance position can be stopped even when there is no trigger hold, and the system is configured so that even when the chance position stops, it is possible that the trigger hold does not exist. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of appearance of a chance, and to frequently make the player feel a sense of anticipation.

Here, the lower right part of the figure is an image diagram of the background effect display. As shown in the same image, the background for non-prefetching is a daytime background, and the background for prefetching is a nighttime background (displayed as "prefetching zone"). The system is configured to be able to notify whether or not there is a pending trigger within the system. In this embodiment, the background for prefetching is displayed when the background effect execution flag is on, and the background for non-prefetching is displayed when the background effect execution flag is off.

In the case of No in step 2352, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines performance contents (for example, story performance, etc.) exclusively for when the trigger is held and extinguished, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the background effect execution flag, and proceeds to step 2376.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 2374 creates special effects before the trigger hold is extinguished (for example, an effect that displays a countdown until the trigger is held and extinguished) based on the fluctuation mode of the main game symbol. ), and the process moves to step 2376 (hereinafter, an effect that displays a countdown until the trigger is held and expired may be referred to as a countdown effect).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the "prefetch-only background" as the background effect during the change (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-sub control board 2308) and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2308).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354 or step 2356, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the performance content based on the fluctuation mode of the main game symbols, and moves to the process of step 2366. In addition, in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the performance content to a performance dedicated to the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state {final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state (at the 100th variation after the end of the jackpot), it is determined that the exclusive performance limited to the one variation is executed, and the process moves to step 2366. In this way, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the look-ahead effect is not executed in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state, but the final variation-specific effect in the time-reduced gaming state is configured to be executed. .

In addition, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, the performance content dedicated to when the trigger is held and is extinguished is different from the performance content that is exclusive to the time before the trigger is held and extinguished, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be used as content. Further, in the variation related to the trigger hold, it may be configured to execute both the effect content exclusive to before the trigger hold is extinguished and the effect content exclusive to the time of the trigger hold extinguishment.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment in which the probability fluctuation gaming state ends after the execution of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state, that is, In the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, by configuring to execute a special performance limited to one variation, it is possible to improve the interest in the time reduction gaming state.

In addition, in modification example 3 from the second embodiment, the final variation of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state and the next variation (the first variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state) are common effects. However, in the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the common performance will not be executed. In addition, it is possible to execute the look-ahead performance across the final variation and the next variation (the first variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state) of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, but it is not possible to The system is configured so that the look-ahead performance is not executed across the symbol variation one time before the final variation of a variable game state and a time-reduced game state and the final variation of a non-probability variable game state and a time-reduced game state.

(Example 4 of changes from the second embodiment)
In a third modification example from the second embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the probability fluctuation game state ends after the execution of symbol fluctuations a predetermined number of times, in a time reduction game state in a configuration where the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability fluctuations. Although an example of the performance mode to be executed has been illustrated, the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the third modification from the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third modification example from the second embodiment is referred to as a fourth modification example from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the third modification example from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the production content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 3) in FIG. 48 in modification example 4 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the third modification example of the second embodiment are steps 2378 (second variation 4) to step 2382 (second variation 4). That is, after determining in step 2356 that the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in the time-saving game state, in step 2378 (second change 4), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the remaining number of time-saving games (time-saving game It is determined whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the state ends (which is the same value as the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c) is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 30 times). If Yes in step 2378 (second change 4), in step 2380 (second change 4), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is executed in the first half of the time reduction game state based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. The content of the performance is determined from a plurality of performance candidates (including at least the cut-in performance, but not the remaining number of times suggestion performance), and the process moves to step 2366. In addition, the process of step 2380 (second change 4) and the process of step 2383 (second change 4), that is, when the remaining time reduction number is 30 or more, and when the remaining time reduction number is less than 30 and the time reduction game state The table referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol is the same (the selection tendency of the variation time is the same) in the case where it is not the final variation of the main game symbol. In addition, in the final variation in the time reduction game state, the multiple performance candidates for the performance content to be executed include a performance that suggests the remaining number of times but does not perform a cut-in performance, and the main game symbol The table referred to when determining the variation mode is different from the case where the time reduction gaming state is not the final variation of the time reduction gaming state (the selection tendency of the variation time is different). The above configuration is applicable to both cases where the main game symbol is a win or a loss.

On the other hand, if the result in step 2378 (second change 4) is No, that is, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the remaining number of time savings is not a predetermined number (for example, 30) or more (the remaining number of time savings is less than 30). In step 2382 (second change 4), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a plurality of performance candidates ( (includes at least a cut-in effect and a remaining number of times suggestion effect), and proceeds to step 2366.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment in which the probability fluctuation gaming state ends after the execution of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state, that is, Although the selection tendency of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different between the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state and the variation one time before the final variation of the time reduction gaming state, a common effect is executed. It is configured to obtain. In addition, the performance tendency of the time-saving game state is different between after the end of the jackpot and up to the 70th variation (time-saving first half) and from the 71st variation to the 100th variation after the end of the jackpot (time-saving final variation) (time-saving second half). (For example, in the first half of time saving, a cut-in effect may be executed but a countdown effect is not executed, while in the second half of time saving, a countdown effect may be executed but a cut-in effect is not executed.) Even in the state and time reduction gaming state, the selection tendency of the variation mode (the reference variation mode determination table) is the same for the symbol variation 1 time before the time saving final variation and the symbol variation 35 times before the time saving final variation. However, the tendency of the performance to be executed is different, or the execution or non-execution of a specific performance (for example, a performance suggesting the number of remaining times or a cut-in performance) is configured to be different. It should be noted that the specific effect may be configured not to be executed in the final time saving variation or the symbol variation one time before the final time saving variation.

In addition, in this example, the following configuration may be used as a configuration regarding the performance executed in the time reduction gaming state.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {see limited frequency table 1 state of referring to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B1) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3), the limited frequency A cut-in effect may be executed when the symbol changes more than a predetermined number of times, which is less than the number of stays in the limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol changes from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2) after the final change in B2. The remaining number of times suggestion effect is configured so that it is not executed, and symbol fluctuations within a predetermined number of times are less than the number of stays in limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol fluctuations from the start to the end of limited frequency B2) from the final fluctuation in limited frequency B2. At times, both a cut-in effect and a remaining count suggestion effect may be performed. Further, at the limited frequency B3, the cut-in effect is not executed, but the remaining number of times suggestion effect may be executed. The above configuration is applicable to both cases where the main game symbol is a win or a loss.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, in the case of transitioning to the non-probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {Limited frequency table 1 Referencing state (limited frequency B1)→limiting frequency table 2 referring state (limiting frequency B2)→limiting frequency table 3 (limiting frequency B3)] A cut-in effect may be executed when the symbol changes more than a predetermined number of times, which is less than the number of stays in the limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol changes from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2) after the final change in the frequency B2. is configured so that the remaining number of times suggestion effect is not executed, and symbols within a predetermined number of times are less than the number of stays in limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol changes from the start to the end of limited frequency B2) from the final variation in limited frequency B2. At the time of fluctuation, both the cut-in effect and the remaining count suggestion effect may be executed. Furthermore, at the limited frequency B3, the cut-in performance is not performed, but the remaining number of times suggestion performance may be performed. The above configuration is applicable to both cases where the main game symbol is a win or a loss.

(Third embodiment)
In this embodiment, an example of a gaming machine configured to be able to shift to a limited frequency state after a jackpot is exemplified, but the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is an example of main game tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variable gaming state is designed to be "22/1022". The details will be described later, but by changing the jackpot probability, it is possible to adjust the probability of winning the jackpot in the probability variable gaming state. Also,
It is not designed to shift to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot related to "4A" or "4B", that is, it is not designed to shift to the probability variable gaming state after all the jackpots are completed.

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 1502 (third) and step 1506 (third). First, in step 1502 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2. The counter value G is within the first stage range (within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages, and 80≧G>50). Determine whether it exists or not. If Yes in step 1502 (third), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to limited frequency table 1 in step 1504, and if No, the process moves to step 1506 (third). Next, in step 1506 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the second stage range (the second stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether the counter value is within the range of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 and 50≧G>10). If Yes in step 1506 (third), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to limited frequency table 2 in step 1508, and if No, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to limited frequency table 3 in step 1510. Determine the variation mode of game symbols.

Next, FIG. 53 is an example of limited frequency tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. The contents of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 have the same configuration as the present embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. In the third embodiment, the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 when referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 is different from this embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the limited frequency may be configured as follows. (1) When determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol in the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) (the first main game symbol fluctuates), the first main game symbol Even when determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol without depending on the number of reservations, that is, with reference to the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the limited frequency table 2 related to the first main game symbol are the same as the first main game symbol. (For example, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, refer to the table when the number of reservations in the limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1. ).
(2) Regarding the limited frequency table 1, similarly to the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of reservations (the number of reservations on the second main game side).
(3) When transitioning to the limited frequency B state, the limited frequency table 2 may be the first referenced limited frequency table.
(4) In Figure 13, for locations where the table to be referenced in the case of a win and the table to be referred to in the case of a loss have the same time value, the time value in the case of a win is compared to the time value in the case of a loss. For example, for limited frequency table 3, 5 seconds is selected in both cases of winning and losing, but for limited frequency table 3, 6 seconds is selected in case of winning. In the case of a loss, the time period may be set to 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure the time to notify the player of the win.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may have multiple variations (preferably less than 10 variations); for example, the limited frequency table 3 is configured to be referenced when the limited frequency counter value is between 1 and 5. You may.
(6) Each table in the figure (limited frequency tables 1 to 3, all tables referred to in the case of winning, losing, 0 to 1 pending, 2 to 3 pending, and 16 For any one of the tables), the number of variable time candidates may be increased by one more type, for example, all tables may be configured to have two or more variable time candidates. In such a configuration, as an example of a time value to be added, a time value that is twice the longest time value that each table has may be added, and in that case, the random value range will be the longest time value that each table has. The random value range of the time value may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of loss on the second main game side in limited frequency table 1, "Random value 0 to 799 → 1 second", "Random value 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "Random value 912-1023→6 seconds".

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 16 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1783-1, CPUMC of the main control board M is a probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to a probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, It is determined whether or not the jackpot related to 7B) has ended. If Yes in step 1783-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1783-2. Next, in step 1783-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the variable probability counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1783-4. Furthermore, in the case of No in step 1783-1 (that is, in the case where the stopped jackpot symbols are 4A and 4B which are non-probable variable jackpots), the process moves to step 1783-4. Next, in step 1783-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1783-5, 1783-6, and 1783-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, the auxiliary game time saving flag, and the limited frequency B flag, respectively. Next, in step 1783-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). . Also, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the jackpot loop rate in the probability-changing gaming state. The jackpot loop rate in the probability-variable gaming state is when the probability-variable gaming state is won before the probability-variable gaming state ends, and the probability-variable gaming state changes after the jackpot ends. The probability is {initial hit (a jackpot won in a non-probability-changing gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state is a jackpot that transitions to a probability-changing gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability after the end of the jackpot is It may also be the probability of winning the jackpot again during the period of the variable gaming state and the time-reduction gaming state). In addition, in the probability fluctuation game state (and time reduction game state), since the game is configured so that the second main game symbol is varied by right-handed hitting, the game is progressed, so the case where only the second main game symbol is varied is Illustrated. In this example, the transition rate to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends is "800/1024" (probability that either 5B or 7B will be selected among all the jackpots on the second main game side). Yes, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the probability-variable gaming state (since the number of continuations is 80 in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot in any of the 80 lottery draws in the probability-variable gaming state) is , "1-{(1-22/1024) ⁸⁰ }=0.809" (80.9%). Therefore, the jackpot loop rate (%) in the probability-variable gaming state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability-variable gaming state continues, is 800/1024 x 0.809 x 100 = 64.4 (%). As described above, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the probability-changing gaming state is determined by two factors: the probability of transitioning to the probability-changing gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability-changing gaming state. It is configured to be adjustable so that the loop rate does not become an excessively high value.Also, by designing the jackpot loop rate in the probability-variable gaming state based on multiple factors, the probability-variable gaming state can be adjusted after the jackpot ends. This means that the probability of transitioning to or the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability-variable gaming state can be designed to be a higher value than the jackpot loop rate in the probability-variable gaming state.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process related to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) in FIG. 19. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the switching timing of the staying stage {The staying stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when a special game ends (or won), the timing when the gaming state shifts, It is determined whether the timing is the timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even if the game state is the same), the timing when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number of times (even if the game state is the same), etc. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). If the result in step 2626 is No, in step 2630 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "empty stage" as the staying stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Note that if the answer is No in step 2624, the process also moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). In this way, the "space stage" is set in the same way in both the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state and the non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state. The performance tendency is the same in the game state and time reduction game state and the non-probability variable game state and time reduction game state. In addition, if a particular combination of decorative symbols (for example, "777" or "333") stops displaying and hits the jackpot, even if the staying stage is the "space stage", after the jackpot ends, the game will enter the probability-changing gaming state. However, if a combination of other decorative symbols (for example, ``222'') stops displaying and you hit the jackpot, the probability will change after the jackpot ends even if the stay stage is the ``Space Stage.'' It may be configured such that it is not known whether or not the state has shifted to a variable gaming state. The number of types of combinations of specific decorative patterns such as "777" and "333" may be smaller than the number of combinations of other decorative patterns such as "222".

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, in a gaming machine where the probability variation gaming state ends after the execution of a predetermined number of symbol variations, the game machine shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. We provide a jackpot and a jackpot that transitions to a non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability fluctuates based on two factors: the probability of transitioning to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability varying gaming state. By adjusting the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state so that it does not become an excessively high value, the probability of transitioning to the probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends or the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability-variable gaming state can be changed to a probability-variable state. This means that the jackpot loop rate can be designed to a higher value than the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state.

Note that the gaming machine according to this example may be designed as follows.
(1) The jackpot probability in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state is 1/319.7
(2) The jackpot probability in the probability variable gaming state is 1/60.96
(3) After the jackpot ends, the transition rate to the probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state is 80%, and the number of symbol changes (ST number) in the probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state is 100 times (4 ) Transition rate to the probability-variable gaming state and time-shortened gaming state after the jackpot ends × Probability of winning the jackpot in the probability-variable gaming state and time-shortening gaming state = 1-(1-1/60.96) ¹⁰⁰ × 80/100=0.647
(5) Transition rate to non-probability fluctuating gaming state and time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends x Probability of winning the jackpot in non-probability fluctuating gaming state and time-shortening gaming state = 1-(1-1/319. 7) ¹⁰⁰ × 20/100 = 0.054
(6) It may be configured such that "(4) above + (5) above" = 0.701 becomes a substantial consecutive winnings continuation rate.

(Example 1 of change from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the jackpot loop rate in the probability variable gaming state is made excessively high by two factors: the probability of transitioning to the probability varying gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability varying gaming state. Although an example of a gaming machine configured to be adjustable so as not to be set as a value has been illustrated, the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be referred to as modification example 1 from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 56 is an example of main game tables 1 to 3 according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, as exemplified in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the jackpot during the jackpot, so that after the jackpot ends, the probability variable game is played. The long open jackpot on the first main game side is "5A/7A", and the long open jackpot on the first main game side is The probability of being selected is "524/1024", the long open jackpot on the second main game side is "5B/7B", and the probability that the long open jackpot on the second main game side is selected is "800". /1024'', and the percentage of jackpots on the second main game side becoming long open jackpots is higher than the jackpots on the first main game side. The system is configured such that when a jackpot occurs on the gaming side, it is easier to shift to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, the number of rounds to be executed is 16R for all jackpots, and rounds where it is easy for the game ball to enter and rounds where it is difficult for the game ball to enter are provided based on the jackpot symbols. Here, the number of rounds in which the game ball is likely to enter the jackpot is the actual number of rounds, and the actual number of rounds for "2A" and "2B" is the actual number of rounds for "4R", "5A", and "5B". The numbers are "8R", "7A" and "7B", but the actual number of rounds is "16R".

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 4 in modification example 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third change 1), step 1745-1 (third change 1) to step 1745-8 (third change 1), and step 1750 (third change 1). ), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command to the sub-control board S side in step 1708, or in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M If it is determined that the special game execution flag is on, in step 1711 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round to be executed is a round related to the opening of the second grand prize opening C20. Determine whether If Yes in step 1711 (third change 1), the process moves to step 1800, and if No, the process moves to step 1712.

In addition, in step 1718, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag, in step 1745-1 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the jackpot symbol during the stop is the It is determined whether or not it is a 1-length open symbol (the first big prize opening C10 is a long-open jackpot symbol, 5B, 7B, 7A). If Yes in Step 1745-1 (Third Variation 1), in Step 1745-2 (Third Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M selects a long open pattern (relative 1745-4 (3rd variation 1) is set. On the other hand, if No in step 1745-1 (third change 1) (when the jackpot symbols are 2A, 5A, 2B), in step 1745-3 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is Set a short opening pattern (an opening pattern that opens relatively for a short time and makes it difficult for game balls to enter) as the opening pattern of the first big winning hole C10, and step 1745-4 (third change 1). to move to. Next, in step 1745-4 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first grand prize opening C10 (the first grand prize opening C10 is opened in the 14th round and the 16th round). At the same time, the release timer is started and the process moves to step 1722. In the first modification from the third embodiment, the jackpot symbols (long open jackpot symbols) that can easily enter the specific area C22 are "5A, 7A, 5B, 7B", while the first jackpot C10 is long The opening jackpot symbols (first long opening symbol) are "7A, 5B, 7B". In addition, although details will be described later, in the first modification from the third embodiment, at the time when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the notification that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is not notified, and after that, , is configured to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 when the game ball enters the first big prize opening C10. Here, although "5A" is a jackpot symbol that makes it easy for the ball to enter the specific area C22, the first big winning hole C10 is opened for a short time, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole C10. It is constructed so that it does not ball. In other words, after the jackpot related to "5A" ends, the state shifts to a probability variable gaming state (because it is easy to enter the specific area C22), but the fact that the ball enters the specific area C22 is a jackpot that is not reported, and the hidden probability variable pattern is a jackpot. It is sometimes called.

Further, in this example, when the game ball passes through the specific area C22, it may be configured to notify that the ball has entered the specific area C22. In the case of such a configuration, furthermore, in the distribution game execution round for a long open jackpot (a jackpot in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area C22), "Aim for V!" is displayed on the effect display device SG. It may also be configured to execute a production (sometimes referred to as a specific area firing production) that instructs the player to fire a game ball toward the jackpot, as shown in FIG. ). In addition, in the round before the distribution game execution round, a performance is executed that instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the big prize opening, such as "Aim for V in the next round". It may be configured as follows. In addition, if the configuration is such that the specific area firing effect can be executed in the distribution game execution round or the round before the distribution game execution round, at the time of the first hit (non-probability fluctuating game state and non-time reduction game The specific area firing effect during a jackpot won in the state) and the specific area firing effect during consecutive wins (during a jackpot won in a time-reduced gaming state) may be configured to be different, or during consecutive wins. The configuration may be such that the specific area firing effect is not executed. For example, the specific area firing performance at the time of the first hit may be configured such that the display area of "Aim for V!" is larger than the specific area firing performance at the time of successive hits. In addition, ending effects {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls acquired during consecutive games, conditions that result in one or more combinations of multiple types of specific performances, etc.) A special game display or a specific game display that is displayed only when the above conditions are met. The presentation mode of the specific area firing effect executed during a jackpot with no ending effect may be configured to be different from the presentation mode of the specific area firing effect executed during a jackpot without an ending effect, or the ending effect may be different. It may be configured such that the specific area firing effect is not executed during the jackpot that is being executed. As an example, a specific area firing effect during a jackpot without an ending effect is configured so that the display area of "Aim for V!" is larger than a specific area firing effect during a jackpot when an ending effect is being executed. You may.

Further, in step 1722, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a gaming state information command related to the special game to the sub-control board S side (command indicating that a special game is in progress as the gaming state), step 1745 -5 (3rd change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the specific area ball entry flag {which is turned on in step 1832 (3rd change 1) when the game ball enters the specific area C22. flag} is on. If Yes in Step 1745-5 (Third Variation 1), in Step 1745-6 (Third Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball entering the first big prize opening C10 has been detected. Determine whether If Yes in Step 1745-6 (Third Variation 1), in Step 1745-7 (Third Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific area entry command (command to the sub-control board S side). A command indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is set. Next, in step 1745-8 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific area entry flag, and proceeds to step 1724. Note that if No in step 1745-5 (third change 1) or step 1745-6 (third change 1), the process moves to step 1724. In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub-control board S side in step 1738, in step 1750 (3rd change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M A game state determination process after the end of the special game is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process related to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1830 (third variation 1), step 1831 (third variation 1), step 1900 (third variation 1), and step 1832 (third variation 1), that is, In step 1802, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distributed game execution flag is off, in step 1830 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the specific area C22. The opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 is set, and the process moves to step 1810. The configuration of the big winning hole is not limited to this, but only one big winning hole is provided, and a movable shielding member that can block the ball from entering the specific area C22 is provided, and the allocation game execution round In the other rounds, the shielding member remains closed, and in the distribution game execution round, the shielding member may be configured to open upon detecting the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening. In addition, in step 1812, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game execution flag, in step 1831 (3rd change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M changes to the set opening pattern. to open the second big prize opening C20 (in the distribution game execution round, the second big prize opening C20 will be open for a long time), start the opening timer, and proceed to step 1900 (third change 1). Transition. In addition, in step 1802, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distributed game execution flag is on, the process also moves to step 1900 (third change 1). Next, in step 1900 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a shielding member drive control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1816. In addition, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and then in step 1832 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the specific area entry flag. Turn on, and proceed to step 1828.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third modification 1) in FIG. 58 in modification example 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the rounds currently being executed are distributed game execution rounds (rounds in which the shielding member C28 can be opened, and in this example, the 4th R, 6th R, and 8th R ). If Yes in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1902 whether or not the entry of the first game ball in the special game being executed has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M is short-released (when the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big prize opening C20 during execution of the special game, The driving of the shielding member C28 is started at a short opening time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball, and the process moves to step 1906. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, the process also moves to step 1906.

Next, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped jackpot symbol is the second main game length open jackpot symbol (in any distributed game execution round among the jackpots on the second main game side). It is determined whether the shielding member C28 is a jackpot symbol that can become a long open, and in this example, is 5B/7B). If Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round being executed is the 6th R. If Yes in step 1908, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the entry of the second game ball in the round being executed (in this example, the 6th round) has been detected. . If Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board The driving of the shielding member C28 is started when it is almost certain that the game ball will enter, or the opening time is set to be long enough to facilitate the ball entry, and the process moves to step 1914. Note that if the answer is No in step 1906, step 1908, or step 1910, the process also moves to step 1914.

Next, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stopped jackpot symbol is the first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbol (one of the distributed game execution rounds among the jackpots on the first main game side). It is a jackpot symbol in which the shielding member C28 can be opened long, and in this example, it is 5A・
7A). If Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round being executed is the 8th R. If Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the entry of the 6th game ball in the round being executed (in this example, the 8th round) has been detected. . If Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts driving the shielding member C28 in the long open state, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1816). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1901, step 1914, step 1916, or step 1918, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1816). The opening time of the shielding member C28 is 50 ms in the case of short opening, and 29000 ms in the case of long opening. In addition, when the opening period of the second big prize opening C20 ends while the shielding member C28 is being driven (opening), the driving of the shielding member C28 is forcibly terminated (closed).

Here, the right part of the figure is a list of the count numbers at which the shielding member C28 will be opened in the distribution game execution round. First, in the case of the first main game shielding member short opening jackpot symbol (2A), the shielding member C28 opens only at the 1st count in all of the 4th R, 6th R, and 8th R. Note that the first count means the first ball entering the round in progress. Further, when the shielding member C28 opens at the first count, the shielding member C28 becomes short open, and when the shielding member C28 opens at the second or sixth count, the shielding member C28 becomes long open. There is. Next, in the case of the first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbol (5A/7A), the 4th R and 6th R are only the 1st count, and the 8th R is the 1st and 6th counts. . That is, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big prize opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbol (5A, 7A), the 6th ball of 8R The game ball that has entered the eye will enter the specific area C22. Next, in the case of the second main game short open jackpot symbol (2B), similarly to the first main game shielding member short open jackpot symbol, all of the 4th R, 6th R, and 8th R are shielded only at the 1st count. Member C28 opens. Next, in the case of the second main game length open jackpot symbols (5B and 7B), the 4th R and 8th R are only the first count, and the 6th R is the first and second counts. In other words, if the game balls continue to be fired toward the second big prize opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbols (5B and 7B), the second ball entered in the 6R The game ball will enter the specific area C22. In addition, in the distribution game execution round, no matter which jackpot symbol the special game is related to, in all distribution game execution rounds (4th R, 6th R, and 8th R), the first count game ball enters. Accordingly, the shielding member C28 is opened (in this example, it is opened by short opening). Note that the round in which the shielding member C28 for each jackpot symbol is left open for a long time and the configuration of the count are not limited to this, but for example, the configuration is such that only the jackpot symbols on the first main game side are divided into three groups. Specifically, when the jackpot related to "7A" is executed, the shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the game ball on the second count of the 6th round, and when the jackpot related to "5A" is executed, It may be configured such that the shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the game ball at the 6th count of the 8th round, and the shielding member C28 is not opened long when the jackpot related to "2A" is executed.

In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the distributed game execution round is any one of the even-numbered rounds of the 2nd R, 4th R, 6th R, 8th R, 10th R, and 12th R, or a combination of multiple rounds. Alternatively, the distributed game execution round may be one odd-numbered round or a combination of a plurality of rounds. Furthermore, the shielding member C28 is not driven in rounds other than the distribution game execution round. Furthermore, the round and count number in which the shielding member C28 is long-opened (or short-opened) are not limited to the configuration of this example. For example, (1) the first main game shielding member long-opening jackpot symbol (5A/7A) (2) In the case of a jackpot related to 5A, the shielding member C28 opens long on the second count of the 4th R in the jackpot related to 7A, In case of jackpot, the 6th R
(3) The shielding member C28 opens long at the 6th count of the 8th R in the jackpot related to the second main game jackpot symbols (5B and 7B). (4) 3B is newly provided as a jackpot symbol on the second main game side, and in the case of a jackpot related to 3B, the shielding member C28 is opened long at the second count of 4R, and in the case of a jackpot related to 5B, the shielding member C28 is opened long on the second count of 4R. The shielding member C28 may open long at the 6th count of 6R, and in the case of a jackpot related to 7B, the shielding member C28 may open long at the 2nd count of 8R.

Further, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the following configuration may be adopted. (1) There are multiple types of first main game shielding member short open jackpot symbols, first main game shielding member long open jackpot symbols, second main game short open jackpot symbols, and second main game long open jackpot symbols, ( 2) The first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbols that exist in multiple types are divided into A group and B group, and during the jackpot related to A group, the 6R is the shielding member at the 1st count and the 6th count. C28 opens and during the jackpot related to group B, the 4th R opens at the 1st count and the 6th count, (3) during the jackpot related to the 1st main game shielding member short open jackpot symbol. The shielding member C28 may have a round opening at the first count and the sixth count, but in such a case, it is preferable that the opening of any shielding member C28 is a short opening. (4) The first main game shielding member length opening jackpot symbols are divided into A group, B group, and C group, and during the jackpot related to A group, the 6th R is the shielding member at the 1st count and the 6th count. C28 opens, and during the jackpot related to group B, the shielding member C28 opens at the 1st and 6th counts of the 4th R, and during the jackpot related to the C group, the 6th R opens the 1st and 2nd counts. (5) A jackpot on the first main game side and a jackpot on the second main game side, and a jackpot where the shielding member C28 opens on the 1st and 6th counts of the 6th R (same round and a jackpot in which the shielding member C28 opens at the same count), and in such a configuration, the same round for all jackpots on the first main game side, and, The proportion of jackpots on the first main game side that are opened by the shielding member C28 at the same count is selected by the shielding member C28 in the same round and at the same count for all jackpots on the second main game side. It is preferable to configure the system so that the jackpot on the second main game side that is opened is lower than the ratio of selection. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot related to 7A, the shielding member C28 opens at the 1st and 2nd counts of the 6th R, which is the same as the jackpot related to the 2nd main game length opening jackpot symbol, and the shielding member C28 opens according to 5A. In the case of a jackpot, the shielding member C28 opens at the 1st and 6th counts of the 8th R. In addition, during the jackpot related to 7A, from the start of the jackpot, there is a production that notifies the player that it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22, and a battle victory production (the player is notified of the ease of entering the ball into the specific area C22) After inciting the game ball, a performance to notify that it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area C22) is executed. After promoting the ease of play to the player, a performance that does not notify the player that it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area C22) is executed (a battle defeat performance is performed during the jackpot related to 5B) However, in reality, it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area C22).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict when the shielding member C28 will be opened for a long time, that is, it becomes difficult for the player to predict when the game ball will enter the specific area C22. As a result, during the special game, the player can maintain a sense of expectation for the probability-changing game state, and the game becomes more interesting. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the shielding member C28 is briefly opened when the game ball enters the first count in all distribution game execution rounds in the jackpot related to all the jackpot symbols. However, it is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to apply the short opening configuration. Specifically, when executing a jackpot related to the first main game shielding member short opening jackpot symbol, the 4th R, 6th R And in the 8th R, the shielding member C28 does not open, and when executing the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbol, the shielding member C28 does not open in the 4th and 6th R, and in the 8th R, the count is 6. The shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the eye game ball, and when the jackpot related to the second main game length opening jackpot symbol is executed, the shielding member C28 is not opened in the 4th R and the 8th R, and in the 6th R. The shielding member C28 may be configured to be opened for a long time when the game ball enters the second count. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even if the jackpot is either a jackpot related to the first main game shielding member short open jackpot pattern or a jackpot related to the first main game shielding member long open jackpot pattern, , it may be configured to have one or more distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the entry of game balls into the big prize openings at the 1st count and the 6th count. With such a structure, both the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member short open jackpot symbol and the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member long open jackpot symbol, the 1st count and the 6th count of the 6th R. If the shielding member C28 is configured to open when the game ball enters the big winning hole, in the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member short opening jackpot symbol, when the game ball enters the big winning hole on the 6th count, the shielding member C28 opens. While the shielding member C28 opens briefly with the ball, in the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member long opening jackpot symbol, the shielding member C28 opens long when the game ball enters the big prize opening on the 6th count. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when configured in this way, the number of distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening at the 1st count and the 6th count is the first The jackpot related to the main game shielding member short open jackpot symbol and the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member long open jackpot symbol may be the same number of times or may be different numbers of times. In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the jackpot of the 1st and 6th counts, is performed by the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member short opening jackpot symbol. In this case, it is the 4th R, and the jackpot related to the first main game shielding member length open jackpot symbol may be the 6th R.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (third change 1) in FIG. 57 in modification example 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 1784-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1784-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1784-2. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1784-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c.

Next, in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M generates a hidden probability variable symbol (a jackpot that makes it easy for the ball to enter the specific area C22, but does not notify that the ball has entered the specific area C22). It is a jackpot symbol related to a jackpot, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the jackpot related to 5A) has ended. If Yes in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag in step 1784-5. Next, in step 1784-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2. Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a command to set the background to "space stage"), and in step 1784 -Move to 8. In this example, the stay stage of the sub-control board S side can be determined by sending a command regarding the stay stage from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side. is not limited to, and may include commands related to the gaming state transmitted from the main control board M side (commands related to which symbol variation is a hit that is transmitted at the start timing of symbol variation, and which gaming state is transmitted after the end of the jackpot) The configuration is such that the sub control board S receives an end demo command (which may be used as an end demo command, etc.) to send whether to proceed to a transition, and the sub control board S determines which stage to set as the stay stage based on the command related to the gaming state. It's okay. Note that this configuration is applicable to configurations related to all stay stages in this example. Also, if No in step 1784-1 or step 1784-11, the process moves to step 1784-8. Next, in step 1784-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1784-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, and in step 1784-10, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to step 1997. Here, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the jackpot loop rate in the probability-changing gaming state. Similar to the third embodiment described above, the first modification from the third embodiment also exemplifies the case where only the second main game symbols are varied. The transition rate to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot is "800/1024" (all jackpots related to long open symbols will enter the specific area C22), and during the probability variable gaming state (number of continuations) The probability of winning the jackpot 80 times in this example) is "1-{(1-22/1024) ⁸⁰ }=0.809". Therefore, the jackpot loop rate (%) in the probability-variable gaming state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability-variable gaming state continues, is 800/1024 x 0.809 x 100 = 64.4 (%). There is.

Note that the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) If you move to a probability variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends, 200 ST times will be given. (2) If you move to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends. (3) Jackpot probability in non-probability fluctuating gaming state = 1/318.1
(4) Jackpot probability in probability variable gaming state = 1/121.8
(5) Substantive probability fluctuation game state transition rate after the end of the jackpot on the first main game side = 50%, that is, long open jackpot on the first main game side: short open jackpot = 5:5
(6) Substantive probability fluctuation game state transition rate after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side = 80%, that is, long open jackpot on the second main game side: short open jackpot = 8:2
By configuring in this way, the number of times of time saving when shifting to a probability variable game state after the end of a jackpot is greater than the number of times of time saving when shifting to a non-probability variable game state after the end of a jackpot.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 19 in modification example 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 2530-1 (third change 1) to step 2530-9 (third change 1), that is, it is determined that the special game flag is on in step 2502. Or, after turning on the special game flag in step 2506, in step 2530-1 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the jackpot being executed is the second main game length release notification. Jackpot symbol (a jackpot on the second main game side where the ball easily enters the specific area C22, and a jackpot symbol that is notified at that time when the ball enters the specific area C22, in this example, 5B/7B ) is the jackpot. If Yes in Step 2530-1 (Third Variation 1), CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to continue production (probability change after the jackpot ends) as a production during the jackpot in Step 2530-2 (Third Variation 1). A command is set to display on the effect display device SG a production to notify the transition to a gaming state, and the process moves to step 2530-6 (third change 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2530-1, in step 2530-3 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the jackpot being executed is the first main player opening notification jackpot symbol (in the specific area C22). This is a jackpot on the first main game side that is easy to enter, and is a jackpot symbol that is notified at that time when the ball enters the specific area C22, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot according to 7A). do. If Yes in Step 2530-3 (Third Variation 1), CPUSC of the sub-control board S in Step 2530-4 (Third Variation 1) sets the battle victory performance (probability after the jackpot ends) as the performance during the jackpot. A command is set to display on the performance display device SG a production that notifies the transition to a variable gaming state, and the process moves to step 2530-6 (third change 1). In addition, in the case of No in step 2530-3 (third change 1), in step 2530-5 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a battle defeat effect (jackpot ends) as the effect during the jackpot. A command is set to display on the performance display device SG a performance that does not definitively notify the subsequent game state, and the process moves to step 2530-6 (third change 1). Next, step 2530-
6 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of prizes won. Next, in step 2530-7 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a specific area entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2530-7 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the running jackpot is the long open notification jackpot symbol (first main game It is a jackpot symbol that is the sum of the long opening notification symbol and the second main game long opening notification symbol, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot related to 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 2530-8 (third change 1), CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a specific area entry performance (a ball entered the specific area C22) in step 2530-9 (third change 1). A command is set to execute the effect (notifying effect), and the process moves to step 2520. On the other hand, if No in step 2530-7 (third change 1) (the jackpots being executed are 2A, 5A, 2B in this example), or if No in step 2530-8 (third change 1), Also, the process moves to step 2520. In this way, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even if a ball enters the specific area C22, it is not notified at that time, and the information is specified when the ball enters the first big prize opening C10. It is configured to be able to execute a specific area entry effect which is an effect to notify that a ball has entered the area C22.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third variation 1) in FIG. 19 in modification example 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage switching timing {here, the staying stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when a special game ends (is won), the timing when the game state shifts, This may be the timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the same gaming state), the timing when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state), etc. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2632, in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2634, in step 2635 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received the space stage command (command set in step 1784-7) from the main control board M side. . If Yes in step 2635, in step 2636, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the stay stage {type of performance content, and if the stay stage is different, the effects that can be executed (background effects, preview effects, etc.) are different. }, the "space stage" is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2999).

Further, if No in step 2634, in step 2638, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "empty stage" as the staying stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, if No in step 2635, in step 2637, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "evening stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 2632, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). In this way, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the space stage command is received from the main control board M side, that is, in the time reduction gaming state, a symbol that is not a hidden probability variable symbol (5A in this example) When the ball enters the specific area C22 in the jackpot related to (transfers to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends), the "space stage" is set as the stay stage. If no ball is entered (does not shift to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends), or after the end of the jackpot related to the hidden probability variable symbol (in this example, 5A), the "evening stage" is set as the stay stage. . In other words, the stay stages that are basically set are different depending on whether the game enters a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends and a case where the player enters a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state after the jackpot ends. However, after the end of the jackpot related to the hidden probability variable symbol (5A in this example), even if the transition to the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot ends, the non-probability variable game is played as a stay stage. The same "evening stage" as in the case of transitioning to the time-reduced game state will be set. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state, the stage you will stay in after the jackpot will be determined depending on the type of performance during the symbol change related to the jackpot. may be configured. For example, if you win in a battle performance while the symbols are changing, or if a role is activated during the symbol changes and a performance in which a jackpot is suddenly announced, the stay stage after the jackpot is the "space stage". (It is certain that the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state are in effect), and if a defeat is executed in the battle performance during symbol fluctuation, the stay stage after the jackpot is the "evening stage" ( It may be configured such that it is difficult to determine from the stay stage whether it is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortened gaming state or a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the game ball that triggered the opening of the shielding member C28 can enter the specific area C22 as it is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 even though the shielding member C28 is opened for a long time.

In addition, by configuring as in Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment, the grand prize opening having the specific area C22 in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to the second grand prize opening. C20, and by setting the trigger for executing the performance related to the ball entering the specific area C22 (the performance suggesting the gaming state after the end of the special game) to be the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening C10. (In other words, by differentiating the winning hole having the specific area C22 related to the transition to the probability variable gaming state and the winning hole related to the production that suggests the transition to the probability changing gaming state triggered by the ball being entered), the specific area Even when the game ball actually enters C22, it can be configured so as not to perform an effect indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area C22, and a jackpot that results in such an effect mode (in this example, a jackpot related to 5A) By providing a jackpot), the player saw the performance during the special game triggered by the ball entering the first big winning hole C10, and was disappointed because he realized that the probability fluctuation game state would not change. In reality, the gaming state after the end of the special game is a probability-changing gaming state (because the shielding member C28 inside the second big prize opening C20 was open long and the game ball was entering), and after that the probability fluctuating. The moment the player recognizes that he/she is in a gaming state (the performance to that effect is executed), he/she can become excited, and the interest of the game increases. In addition, even if no ball enters the specific area C22 of the second grand prize opening C20, the entry of the ball into the first grand prize opening will trigger a transition to the probability variable gaming state, or an effect that suggests continuation. This means that it can be carried out. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 in the second grand prize opening C20, the same production mode as that of notifying that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 described above. If the configuration is such that it can be executed, under certain conditions (if an ascension effect, which is a specific effect, occurs during a jackpot, the second main game side's double successive hit instead of the first hit on the first main game side) (e.g., a jackpot after the first run, etc.), the notification mode of the performance may be different from that under the predetermined conditions (the display area under the predetermined conditions is smaller and less conspicuous). , etc.) However, under predetermined conditions, it may be configured such that the same performance as the one that notifies the user that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 described above is not performed. In addition, the ascension performance is a continuous game that occurs under certain conditions (the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, after the occurrence of a specific performance, A specific jackpot executed after the total number of prize balls acquired in the game reaches a predetermined number, etc. (the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively large, such as the number of rounds to be executed is 16 rounds, etc.) This is a performance that occurs when you win a jackpot, etc.).

In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state are entered after the end of the jackpot, the effect display format A (stay stage A) and the effect display format B (stay stage While it is possible to set it to either B), if the state shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, it will not be set to effect display format A (stay stage A), but effect display format B. (Stay stage B) may be configured to be settable. In such a case, the stop symbol combination α is such that the effect display format A (staying stage A) is definitely set after the jackpot ends as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot symbol stops. (For example, "777"), it is not certain that effect display format A (stay stage A) will be set after the jackpot ends {or, it is certain that effect display format B (stay stage B) will be set. target} stop symbol combination β {for example, “222” or “2★2” (★ is an arbitrary number)}, and the number of types of stop symbol combination α is smaller than the number of types of stop symbol combination β. It may be configured as follows.

(Fourth embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a special game, the transition to the probability variable game state is made after the end of the special game, but this is not applicable to the gaming machine of this example. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration with a different gameplay from this embodiment is defined as a fourth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 63 is a front view of a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment will be explained in detail. In the fourth embodiment, the second big winning hole C20 stops when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a small winning symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located to the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10, and is in an open state when the game is played. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize winning opening detection device C21s) A mouth solenoid C24) and a V winning hole C22 (V winning hole in the fourth embodiment) which is an opportunity to execute a special game (in the fourth embodiment, a game in which the first big winning hole C10 is opened). (The opening is a V winning hole C22), a V winning hole entering ball detection device C22s which is a sensor that detects when a game ball enters the V winning hole C22, and a ball entering the second big winning hole C20. It is provided with a sorting accessory C23 for distributing whether the game balls are directly discharged to the outside of the second big winning hole C20 or once guided to the V winning hole C22. Here, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second grand prize opening C20, and the second grand prize opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. generate. The game ball that enters the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d operates the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening C20 and in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the prize. It is made variable (it is made variable by exciting the second big prize opening solenoid C24). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d, but the variable part of the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d is This mode differs from that in that it is variable in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). In other words, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in a state where it is almost completely buried within the game board (playing area D30) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a retracted state), and when it is transparent from the game board (playing area D30). It assumes a state in which it protrudes toward the player (hereinafter referred to as an advancing state) until it approaches the board D16. And, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is a box-shaped member C20-1 that can receive the game ball that protrudes from the game board (game area D30) and flows down the game area D30 (the game ball that enters the box-shaped member When the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20), that is, when the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d takes the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and The game ball can enter into the second big prize opening C20), while when the second big winning mouth electric accessory C21d takes the advancing state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second It is configured such that the game ball cannot enter into the big prize opening C20 (this box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is directly ejected outside the second grand prize opening C20 by the sorting accessory C23, or whether it is once guided to the V winning opening C22. It is structured so that it can be distributed.

Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning hole C22, and plays the role of a presentation (a presentation that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the V winning hole C22) by lighting up or the like.

The above is the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. Prior to explaining the characteristic parts of the fourth embodiment, the game contents that are played on this game board will be outlined. First, the game ball launched toward the game area D30 either flows down a downstream route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), or It is roughly divided into two: flowing down a downstream route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the gaming area D30 (with reference to the center of the gaming area). Here, the game ball that has flown down the left-handed route has the opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first big prize opening C10, while the game ball that has flown down the right-handed route has the opportunity to You can get an opportunity to enter the game starting hole H10, the second big winning hole C20, the second main game starting hole B10, and the first big winning hole C10. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball that has flown down the right-handed route is configured to more easily enter the first big prize opening C10 than the game ball that has flown down the left-handed route ("Enter ball" ``Easy to hit'' and ``Difficult to hit the ball'' are determined based on the number of balls that hit the ball when 10,000 game balls are fired in a right-handed route and a left-handed route, for example).

In addition, on the left-handed hitting route (although not shown), the game ball may or may not be guided toward the first main game starting port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. On the other hand, on the right-handed route (although not shown), there are fewer game nails and windmills than on the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform descending style. take.

More specifically, regarding the right-handed hitting route, first, a game ball fired aiming at the right side of the gaming area D30 (for example, this is the case where the firing intensity of the game ball by the firing device is maximum, and is also called right-handed hitting). , flies within the gaming area D30 along the outer rail D32 and falls due to its own weight by colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the gaming area D30 (with reference to the center of the gaming area). Start. Next, after the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 directly below it with a high probability, the flow path width becomes more than the width of one game ball and less than the width of two game balls. The balls are collected into D50 (the balls are collected regardless of whether the balls enter the auxiliary game starting port H10 or not). Next, the game balls that flowed down along the rectification path D50 are released from the exit of the rectification path D50, and then move to the first stage path D51-, which is slightly tilted to the left with respect to the horizontal direction and has a three-stage configuration. 1. After rolling on each of the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

Here, regarding the first stage passage D51-1, it is formed by the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while regarding the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3, , a game ball passage made of synthetic resin or the like is fixed to the game board in advance. That is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advancing state) and the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the exit of the rectification passage D50 The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → The game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the outlet D36. , and is configured to have a substantially uniform flow pattern.

In this way, the game balls that flow down the right-handed route follow a substantially uniform flow pattern, so when the game balls are continuously fired (one ball is fired at approximately 0.6 second intervals) toward the right-handed route, the assist When the ball stably enters the game starting hole H10 and the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second big prize opening When the ball enters stably into the first big winning opening (inside C20) and the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d becomes open, it can be configured so that the ball stably enters the first big winning opening C10. In addition, in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, there is a second main game starting opening electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state. An object B11d is provided, and when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d enters the advanced state, it is configured to be able to guide the game ball toward the second main game starting port B10. However, this point will be discussed later.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball released from the exit of the rectification passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advancing state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the exit of the rectification passage D50, it is important to have a configuration for reducing the momentum of the game balls flowing down (substantially falling) within the rectification passage D50. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the figure near the exit of the rectification passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectification passage D50 has a shape that projects toward the inside of the rectification passage D50, and this shape allows the inside of the rectification passage D50 to be played. The ball falls in a zigzag pattern, reducing the momentum of the game ball. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, based on the same theory, a configuration is also provided to reduce the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1. This point will be discussed later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage path D51-1 will be described. First, as mentioned above, the first stage passage D51-1 is inclined slightly to the left with respect to the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The big prize opening electric accessory C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 will tend to accelerate if left as it is, so unless some measure is taken to reduce the momentum of the game ball, Even if the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {particularly, the series of displacements from the advanced state → the retracted state → the advanced state is instantaneously (for example, about 0.1 seconds) ), there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be successfully guided to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension, inside the second grand prize opening C20). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is devised so that it progresses in a zigzag manner, such as the shape of the passage near the exit of the rectification passage D50. be.

More specifically, a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the surface side of the game board within the range where the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, and a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the side of the transparent plate D16. The plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are provided, and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are arranged alternately. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the surface of the game board, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 may be directly attached to the back surface of the transparent plate D16. If they become stuck, if the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 will be exposed to the outside, so maintenance There is a risk that a person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (in the worst case, they may come off). . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the fourth embodiment, the wall surface on the side of the transparent plate D16 of the wall surface of the box-shaped member C20-1 is used as the second grand prize opening electric role in the advanced state. The plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are configured to be extended upwards from the object C21d and fixed to the wall surface of the extended box-like member C20-1.

In this way, by providing a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and a plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range where the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the game ball rolling on the path D51-1 advances in a zigzag manner, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage path D51-1 tends to slow down. Here, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot every approximately 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game balls released from the exit of the rectification passage D50 is reduced. reaches the first stage passage D51-1, and the first stage passage D51-
Since the momentum of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, the period of rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 becomes long, and as a result, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d (i.e. Even if the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, it is possible to successfully guide the game ball to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension, inside the second grand prize opening C20). becomes. In addition, the fact that the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is decelerated means that when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the positional spacing of the game balls will be reduced. (This means that the game balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 become jammed). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation where a plurality of game balls are present on the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1), and in this case, the second grand prize Even if the electric mouth accessory C21d (i.e., the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of objects will be moved to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension inside the second grand prize opening C20). It is also possible to guide individual game balls all at once (an image is shown in the lower part of the figure).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the operation mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d will be explained. First, as mentioned above, in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, there is a second main body that can be in a retracted state and an advanced state. A game starting opening electric accessory B11d is provided (the meanings of the retreat state and advancing state are the same as the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d, but as explained below, the second main game starting In the case of the electric mouth accessory B11d, when the advancing state is adopted, the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in an open state where it is easy to enter the game ball, and when the retreating state is adopted, the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10. (This creates a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball.) Here, in the fourth embodiment, for a special game feature to be described later, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (open state). Even if {especially when a series of displacements from the retracted state → advanced state → retracted state is performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds)}, the second main game starting port B10 is entered. It is constructed to physically ensure that it will not ball.

More specifically, the game ball rolling on the second stage passage D51-2, which is inclined slightly to the left with respect to the horizontal direction, once collides with the locking part D51-2a, and then rolls onto the third stage passage D51. It begins to fall due to its own weight towards -3. Here, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d itself is capable of receiving the falling game ball, and the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the advanced state. In addition to being shaped to extend until it reaches the starting port B10, it is also installed so that it is tilted slightly to the right with respect to the horizontal direction, so that the falling game ball will be able to reach the second main game starting port B10. (As shown in the third row of the figure, the direction of movement of the game ball is switched from leftward to rightward.) If the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d maintains the advancing state until the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 reaches the second main game starting port B10. In this case, while the ball enters the second main game starting port B10 as it is, the game ball that starts rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 enters the second main game starting port B10. When the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is displaced to the retracted state, the ball will fall toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game starting port B10 (the same figure). This corresponds to the subsequent game ball in the fourth row).

In this case, the period required for the game ball that starts rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 to reach the second main game starting port B10 is approximately 0.2 to 0.3 seconds. By designing so that It is possible to physically ensure that the ball does not enter the second main game starting port B10 when a series of displacements are instantaneously performed (for example, in about 0.1 seconds).

Next, FIG. 66 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. First, the differences from this embodiment are step 3050 (fourth), step 3100 (fourth), and step 1950 (fourth), that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs special game control. After executing the process, in step 3050 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a small winning game control process to be described later. Next, in step 3100 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution accessory control process to be described later. Next, in step 1950 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a V winning opening ball entry determination process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) in FIG. 4 in the fourth embodiment. Regarding the explanation of the figure, the changes from the third modification example from the second embodiment, which is similar, will be explained in detail. First, the change from the second embodiment to the third modification is step 1332 (fourth), that is, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the second main game starting port B10 (the second If it is determined that the second main game starting opening ball entering information has been received from the main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, in step 1332 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is within the upper limit (in this example, the upper limit for second main game reservation is one). If Yes in step 1332 (fourth), the process moves to step 1333, and if No in step 1332 (fourth), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 3450). In this way, in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is one.

Next, FIG. 68 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart. The differences from this embodiment are step 1403 (fourth), step 1441-1 (fourth), step 1441-2 (fourth), and step 1441-3 (fourth), that is, step 1403 ( In step 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1403 (fourth), the process moves to step 1405, and if No, the process moves to step 1426. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a small win is provided on the first main game side and the second main game side, and therefore, as a condition for starting fluctuation, not being in a small win game is added to the condition. . In addition, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the winning/fail lottery results (refer to the main game table 2), and then in step 1441-1 (see the main game table 2). In step 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers, the winning/failure lottery results, and the gaming state (see main game table 3), and in step 1418 to move to. Further, in step 1436, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol, in step 1444-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a small win symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If Yes in step 1444-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1444-3 (fourth), and proceeds to step 1550. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 1444-2 (fourth) is No, the process moves to step 1550.

Note that this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The winning rate of small winnings on the second main game side is higher than the winning rate of small winnings on the first main game side. It is easier to execute a small win which is an opening pattern of the large winning hole where the ball enters the V winning hole relatively easily than winning a small winning on the side (3) A small winning symbol as a small winning symbol on the first main game side A and a small winning pattern B are provided, and the winning rate of the small winning pattern B is higher than that of the small winning pattern A, and the small winning pattern A is relatively closer to the V winning hole than the small winning pattern B. It is easy to execute a small hit, which is an opening pattern for the big winning hole that makes it easy to enter the ball.

Next, FIG. 69 is an example of main game tables 1 and 2 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the table to be referred to are different depending on whether it is a symbol variation related to the first main game side or a symbol variation related to the second main game side, regardless of the gaming state. There is. In addition, it is configured so that the first main game side and the second main game side can win a small win, and the winning/failure lottery results on the second main game side have a high probability (with a probability of 639/1024) that a small win will be won. Become. Note that the winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this in any way. Furthermore, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these {for example, the losing symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, but may be configured to have multiple types of symbols. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the main game symbol changes to a state where the type of variation and/or selection rate is different from before the specific symbol was stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). }. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the number of rounds to execute a jackpot triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbol is 6 rounds or 12 rounds, and the number of rounds to execute a jackpot triggered by a small hit depends on the trigger. A small hit is counted as one round, making a total of 7 or 13 rounds. The round lamp (not shown) that displays the number of rounds has four types of lighting patterns: 6, 7, 12, and 13 rounds. Also, although the jackpot symbols are described as 4A, 5A, etc., they are not limited to one type for 4A and one type for 5A. For example, the jackpot group 4A includes 4A-1, 4A-2, etc. There are multiple types of jackpot symbols such as..., and the jackpot group 5A is structured so that there are multiple types of jackpot symbols such as 5A-1, 5A-2, etc. Good too. Also, regarding the distribution of random numbers, maintaining the same ratio, for example, 300 types of jackpots belonging to jackpot group 4A are distributed to 300 random numbers from 0 to 299, and 200 types of jackpots from 300 to 499 are distributed. The random numbers may be configured such that 200 types of jackpots belonging to the jackpot group 5A are distributed. Further, this configuration is applicable to all configurations according to this example.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game related to step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 16 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1785-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game triggered by the ball entering the V winning hole C27 has ended. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during execution of the small winning game, so that the jackpot is executed after the small winning ends. If Yes in step 1785-1, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a time-saving jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that transitions to a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends; in this example, it is a 4B・5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1785-2, the process moves to step 1758-5. Further, in the case of No in step 1785-1, in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game triggered by the small winning symbol on the first main game side has ended. . If Yes in step 1785-3, in step 1785-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects the time-saving small winning symbol (if a jackpot is executed using the small winning symbol as a trigger, the CPUMC enters the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends). It is determined whether or not this is after the end of the special game triggered by the small winning symbol (in this example, 7AK) that will be transferred, and the process moves to step 1785-5. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1785-3, the process moves to step 1785-5. Next, in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stopped symbol is the first main game symbol (the jackpot symbol on the first main game side or the small winning symbol on the first main game side). Determine. If Yes in step 1785-5, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 100 times as a predetermined number of times A, which is a relatively large number of times, to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and in step 1785 -Move to 8. In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-5, in step 1785-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 1 as a predetermined number of times B, which is a relatively small number of times, to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, Proceed to step 1785-8. Next, in steps 1785-8 and 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and starts the next process (the process of step 1997). Transition. In addition, if No in step 1785-2, in other words, if the stop symbol is "4A" which is not a time-saving jackpot symbol, or if No in step 1785-4, in other words, if the stop symbol is "2AK" which is a time-saving small jackpot symbol, Even after the special game triggered by `` has ended, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the time reduction gaming state is entered after the end of the jackpot, two types of time reduction are performed as the number of time reductions: predetermined number of times A (100 times) and predetermined number of times B (1 time). After the jackpot on the first main game side ends, the predetermined number A, which is a relatively large number, can become the time-saving number. In other words, if you proceed with the game by hitting left in the non-time reduction gaming state, win a jackpot on the first main game side (the jackpot symbol stops), and move to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends (first hit). ), a predetermined number of times A (100 times) will be given as the number of time saving times. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, (1) the maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is 1, and the probability of winning a small hit on the second main game side (probability of winning a small win when a win/fail lottery is executed) ) is 639/1024, (2) If a jackpot is executed as a result of a small win on the second main game side, after the jackpot ends, the time reduction gaming state will be entered. (3) The first main game When a jackpot is executed triggered by a small hit on the side, after the jackpot ends, there are cases where the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state and a state where it shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state. (4) The first main gaming side's When a jackpot is executed with the stopping of the jackpot symbol as a trigger, the system is configured such that after the jackpot is over, the game state may shift to a time-saving game state or to a non-time-shortening game state.

Note that this example may be configured as follows. In addition, only a part of the following configurations may be applied, or configurations not listed below may be applied (for example, the number of types of small winning symbols may differ between the first main game side and the second main game side. There are multiple types of each side, etc.).
(1) If a ball enters the V winning hole during a small hit, the time reduction game state will be entered after the jackpot triggered by the small hit ends. (2) The small winning symbol will be the first main game. One type is provided on the side and one type is provided on the second main game side. (3) When a ball enters the V winning hole during a small hit, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot triggered by the ball entering is drawn. Determined by (for example, either 7 or 13 rounds, including the execution round of the small winning)
(4) When the jackpot symbol stops, the number of rounds to execute the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol, and there are multiple types of jackpot symbols on the first main game side and the second main game side. (5) The maximum number of reservations on the 1st main game side is 4, and the maximum number of reservations on the 2nd main game side is 1.In this way, the small winning symbol is 1 in each of the 1st main game and the 2nd main game. There are more types of jackpot symbols than small winning symbols, and each of the first main game and the second main game has multiple types. By configuring the system so that the number of subsequent jackpot execution rounds is determined by lottery based on the entry of a ball, for example, after the jackpot ends, the time-saving game state is entered, and the number of time-saving rounds is 100 (when a small hit is won and the small hit is In the case that the number of rounds in which the ball is almost able to enter the V winning hole is given, the number of rounds of jackpot execution triggered by the small hit by visually recognizing the small winning symbol when winning the small hit. has been determined and the number of rounds executed for the jackpot is relatively small, do not intentionally shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole (V winning hole) during the execution of the small winning, and try again next time. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a way different from the original gameplay of waiting for a small win (small win symbol) related to a jackpot with a relatively large number of subsequent rounds to be executed. In addition, the structure of the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot may be structured as follows.
(1) After the jackpot related to 5A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the first main game side won in the non-time reduction gaming state is 6 rounds, (1-1) the first main game symbol and The time reduction gaming state ends when the total number of changes with the 2nd main game symbol is 100 times (1-2) The time reduction gaming state ends when the number of changes only with the 2nd main game symbol is 100 times (1-3) V The time-reduced gaming state ends when there are 5 small wins in a row where the ball does not enter the winning slot (no small winnings where the ball enters the V-winning slot in between) (2) The first player who wins in the time-reducing gaming state After the jackpot related to 5A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the game side is 6 rounds, (2-1) The total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times and the time is reached. The shortened game state ends (2-2) The time shortened game state ends when the number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 1 (2-3) The small hit that does not enter the V winning hole occurs 5 times in a row (in between (3) The time-reduced game state ends when the ball enters the V-winning slot (not including the small winning ball) (3) With the jackpot symbol where the number of rounds to be executed on the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state is 6 rounds. After the jackpot related to a certain 4A ends, it shifts to a non-time reduction gaming state (4) A jackpot related to 4A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the first main game side won in the time reduction gaming state is 6 rounds. After the end, (4-1) The time reduction gaming state ends when the total number of changes of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times (4-2) The number of changes of only the second main game symbol The time-reduced game state ends when the ball enters the V-winning hole once (4-3) The time-reduced game state ends when there are 5 small hits in a row in which the ball does not enter the V-winning hole (no small hits that enter the V-winning hole in between). (5) After the jackpot related to 7A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the first main game side won in the non-time reduction gaming state is 12 rounds, (5-1) the first main game symbol The time reduction gaming state ends when the total number of changes between and the second main game symbol is 100 times (5-2) The time reduction gaming state ends when the number of changes only for the second main game symbol is 100 times (5-3 ) The time-reduced gaming state ends when there are 5 small wins in a row where the ball does not enter the V-winning slot (no small winnings where the ball enters the V-winning slot in between). After the jackpot related to 7A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the 1st main game side is 12 rounds, (6-1) the total number of fluctuations between the 1st main game symbol and the 2nd main game symbol is 5 times. The time-reduced game state ends (6-2) The time-reduced game state ends when the number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 1 (6-3) 5 small wins in a row where the ball does not enter the V winning slot ( The time-reduced game state ends when the small winning ball that enters the V winning slot is not inserted in between (7) The small winning symbol 7AK on the first main game side won in the non-time-reducing gaming state is triggered. After the jackpot ends, the game does not shift to the time-reduced gaming state (8) After the jackpot triggered by 7AK, which is the small winning symbol on the first main game side won in the time-reducing gaming state, (8-1) The time-reduced game state ends when the total number of changes between the first and second main game symbols is 5 (8-2) The time-reduced game state ends when only the second main game symbol changes once. End (8-3) The time reduction game state ends when there are 5 small hits in a row that do not enter the V winning hole (no small hits that enter the V winning hole in between) (9) Non-time reducing game After the jackpot related to 7B, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of rounds executed on the second main game side won in the state is 12 rounds, (9-1) the sum of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol The time shortened game state ends when the number of changes in the second main game symbol is 5 times (9-2) The time shortened game state ends when the number of changes in only the second main game symbol is 1 time (9-3) Small ball that does not enter the V winning slot The time-reduced game state ends when there are 5 consecutive hits (not including small wins that enter the V-winning slot in between) (10) The number of rounds executed on the second main game side that won in the time-reduced game state is After the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol 7B, which is the 12th round, (10-1) the time reduction gaming state ends when the total number of changes between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 (10 -2) The time-reduced game state ends when only the second main game symbol changes once (10-3) Small wins that do not enter the V winning hole 5 times in a row (the ball enters the V winning hole in between) (11- 1) The time reduction game state ends when the total number of changes of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times (11-2) The time reduction game state is ended when the number of changes of only the second main game symbol is 1 time The state ends (11-3) Time is shortened when the ball does not enter the V-winning slot 5 times in a row (no small hits that enter the V-winning slot in between) The gaming state ends (12) Time is shortened After the jackpot triggered by 7BK, which is the small winning symbol on the second main game side won in the gaming state, (12-1) the total number of fluctuations between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is The time shortening game state ends after 5 times (12-2) The time shortening game state ends when the number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 1 time (12-3) 5 small hits where the ball does not enter the V winning hole It may be configured such that the time-saving game state is completed continuously (without intervening a small winning ball that enters the V winning hole).

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) in FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in step 3054. Next, in step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small winning symbols, "0.1 seconds open → 0... It is an open pattern that repeats "closed for 5 seconds" 10 times, and if the game balls continue to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20, a plurality of game balls will enter the second grand prize opening C20. ). Next, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20, starts the small winning game timer MP41t, and moves to step 3062.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3052, in step 3060, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit execution flag is on. If YES in step 3060, the process moves to step 3062.

Next, in step 3062, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has won (entered a ball) into the second big winning hole C20. In the case of Yes in step 3062, in step 3064, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second big winning hole C20. If YES in step 3064, the process moves to step 3068. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3062 or step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small winning game timer MP41t has reached a predetermined time. If YES in step 3066, the process moves to step 3068.

Next, in step 3068, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d and closes the second big winning hole C20. Next, in step 3078, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small winning game timer MP41t. Next, in step 3080, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and moves to the next process {step 3100 (fourth) process}. Note that even in the case of No in step 3060 or step 3066, the process moves to the next process {the process of step 3100 (fourth)}.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the distribution accessory control process related to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 66. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution accessory operation start permission flag is on. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution accessory operation start permission flag. Next, in step 3106, the distribution accessory control means MN60 starts the distribution accessory activation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the sorting accessory operating flag. Next, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution accessory C23 to the second position, and proceeds to step 3112. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3102, the process moves to step 3112. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution accessory C23 is placed in the first position (the position where the part where the game balls are stored is facing upward when viewed from the player) as the initial position. In a certain case, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening C20, the entered game ball is stopped at a position where it is stored in the distribution accessory C23. In addition, the second position is a position where the part where game balls are stored is to the right when viewed from the player (in the case where the game ball enters the second grand prize opening C20 in this position, the corresponding This is the position where the entered game ball is not stored in the sorting accessory C23.

Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the sorting accessory operating flag is on. If Yes in step 3112, in step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution accessory operation timer MN60t, and sets the timer value to the first operation value (the distribution accessory moves from the second position to the first It is determined whether or not the timer value (in this example, 2 seconds) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution accessory C23 to the first position, and moves to the next process {the process of step 1950 (fourth)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3114, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution accessory operation timer MN60t, and sets the timer value to the second operation value (the distribution accessory is moved from the first position. It is determined whether or not the timer value has reached the second position (in this example, 4 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 3118, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution accessory C23 to the second position, and moves to the next process {the process of step 1950 (fourth)}. In addition, when the game ball is stored in the distribution accessory C23 at the timing of the process of step 3120, the game ball will enter the V winning hole C22 with the process as a trigger.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3118, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution accessory operation timer MN60t, and determines that the timer value is the third operation value (the distribution accessory is moved from the second position). It is determined whether or not the timer value has reached the first position (in this example, 6 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 3122, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution accessory C23 to the first position. Next, in step 3126, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution accessory operation flag. Next, in step 3128, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the distribution accessory operation timer MN60t to zero, and moves to the next process (the process of step 3150). Note that also in the case of No in step 3112 or step 3122, the process moves to the next process {the process of step 1950 (fourth)}.

Here, the upper right part of the same figure is an image diagram of the operation of the sorting accessory. The initial position of the sorting accessory C23 is the first position, and it operates to the second position at the same time as the small winning game starts, and changes from "second position → first position → It is configured to operate from the second position to the initial position (first position). In addition, substantially, the distribution accessory activation timer value becomes the first operation value and becomes the first position → the game ball enters the second big prize opening C20 → the game ball reaches the distribution accessory C23 → The game ball is stored in the distribution accessory C23 → The distribution accessory activation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position → The stored game ball enters the V winning hole C22. A jackpot (special game) will be induced by performing a series of actions.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the V winning hole entry ball determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (fourth) in FIG. 66 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a conditional device activation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960, which will be described later). It is determined whether or not the flag (which is turned on when the ball is hit) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning hole C27. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is within the V winning opening valid period (period from the start timing of the small winning game to the end timing of the small winning game). Determine. Incidentally, a discharge waiting time may be provided as a time for waiting until the game ball that enters the second large winning hole C20 for a small hit is discharged outside the second large winning hole C20, and the system is configured in such a manner. In this case, the V winning a prize opening validity period may be set from the start of the small winning game to the end of the discharge standby time. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control unit SM side. is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small winning game to the end timing of the small winning game) has ended. Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device activation flag in step 1964, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1997). Note that even in the case of No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997). In addition, if the answer in step 1956 is No, in other words, if there is a high risk of illegal ball entry, such as a game ball entering the V winning hole C27 even though the small winning game is not being executed, It is preferable to configure the system to perform error processing as appropriate. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to the ball entering the V winning hole C27 is "7R" or "15R", and the series of "small winning game → special game related to the ball entering the V winning hole C27" The sum of the flows is "8R" or "16R", which is the number of rounds related to the small winning game "1R" and the number of rounds related to the special game "7R" or "15R".

Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. First, FIG. 74 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 4A is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. The differences from this embodiment are step 2001 (fourth), step 2003 (fourth), and step 2450 (fourth). That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2001 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the power-on timer SM24t. Note that the power-on timer SM24t is provided to determine the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, step 20
At step 02, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, if RAM clear information is received → initialize the RAM on the sub-side , When various information commands are received → Performance-related information at the time of power outage is reset to the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the information related to the current performance and special symbols will not be restored, and the "Preparing" screen will be displayed until the start of the next variation. Thereafter, the process moves to a loop process in which the CPUSC repeating process routine (b) of the sub-control board S is repeatedly executed. The difference from this embodiment in (b) is that the stay stage determination processing of step 2450 (fourth) and step 2600 is deleted. However, after executing the above-described decorative symbol display control process, in step 2450 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the V winning detection effect display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the process of step 2500. .

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the V winning prize detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a V winning detection command (an effect to notify the player that a game ball has entered the V winning hole C27) from the main side (main control board M side). It is determined whether or not a command for executing the V winning detection performance is received. If Yes in step 2456, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the V winning detection performance (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2500). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2456, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2500). The V winning detection performance is a performance that notifies the player that a game ball will enter the V winning hole C27 and a special game will be executed thereafter, so the content of the performance is a performance that congratulates the player. It is desirable to have a performance that notifies the player of high profits, for example, a performance that displays a "V" on the performance display device SG to fill the display area SG10.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the special during-game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) in FIG. 23 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2585-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of rounds and the number of prizes won numerically. Next, in step 2585-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding reservation (random numbers for winning/failure lottery, random numbers for determining stop symbols, etc.). Next, in step 2585-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a pending item that is scheduled to win a small win. In the case of Yes in step 2585-3, in step 2585-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a small winning pending notification lottery in which the winning is achieved with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Next, in step 2585-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed small winning pending notification lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2585-5, in step 2585-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a small hit pending notification effect (an effect that notifies that there is a pending event that is scheduled to win a small win within the pending condition). ) is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process moves to step 2585-7. Note that if the answer is No in step 2585-3 or step 2585-5, the process also moves to step 2585-7. In addition, by executing the small hit reservation notification performance, it will be notified that there is a reservation that will become a small hit within the reservation, but if a jackpot is executed triggered by the small hit, the jackpot The number of rounds related to this is configured not to be reported, that is, it is configured not to notify which small hit symbol is related to the pending that is the target of the small hit pending notification performance. In addition, the execution timing of the small hit pending notification performance may be determined to be executed in any round below the maximum round of the jackpot to be executed, or it is uniquely determined by the number of execution rounds of the jackpot ( For example, if the number of rounds to be executed is 16R, the 12th round, if the number of rounds to be executed is 8R, the 4th round, etc.).

Next, in step 2585-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the start timing of the round that determines whether or not the number of rounds to execute the jackpot is 16 rounds, and in this example, It is determined whether the start timing of the eighth round has been reached. In this example, since there are 8R and 16R as the number of rounds to be executed (including small wins), the start timing of the 8th round becomes the breakup round start timing. If Yes in step 2585-7, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the jackpot being executed is the maximum round number jackpot (the jackpot in which the number of rounds executed during the jackpot is the maximum, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is In the example, it is determined whether 16R is a jackpot to be executed. If Yes in step 2585-8, in step 2585-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board A command is set to execute the command (for example, "+8RGET!!" is displayed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). If No in step 2585-8, in other words, it is a case of a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds to be executed, and in this example, a case of a jackpot in which the number of rounds to be executed is "8". , In step 2585-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a round-up failure effect (an effect that notifies that the round being executed is the final round of the special game, for example, displays "Unfortunate..."). ) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). Note that even in the case of No in step 2585-7, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2520). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as performances executed during the special game, there is a small hit pending notification performance that notifies whether or not there is a pending that will become a small win within the pending, and a large hit that is currently being executed. The round-up success effect (failure effect) and the round-up success effect (failure effect) to notify that the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large are configured to be able to be executed. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, since the number of execution rounds of the special game is only 8R and 16R, the jackpot does not end at the 8th round, that is, it is certain that the 9th round will be executed. It is certain that the number of rounds to be executed for the special game in the middle is 16R, but the number of rounds to be executed is not limited to this, and the number of rounds to be executed may be increased. It may be configured such that the "up failure performance") is executed multiple times during one special game. Specifically, five rounds are provided as the number of rounds to be executed, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 16R, and the rounds in which the special game except the maximum number of rounds can be completed (4th R, 6th R, 8th R, 10th R) The special game may be configured to perform an effect (for example, perform a battle effect and continue if not defeated) to incite whether or not to continue the special game. The execution timing of the round-up effect may be configured to be executed in a round earlier than the break-up round start timing. In addition to the above-mentioned small hit pending notification performance and round-up performance, there is also a small hit pending notification that indicates the number of execution rounds of the jackpot that is currently being executed, or that there is a pending small hit in the pending, that is, small hit pending notification. It may be configured to be able to perform one performance that combines a performance and a round-up performance, and the combined performance may be performed in a predetermined round in the jackpot.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot execution rounds are provided in response to a small win on the second main game side, and the jackpot continues. A round-up effect that notifies that a jackpot is executed and has a relatively large number of executed rounds can be executed during a jackpot, and a small win that notifies that there is a hold that becomes a small win within the hold. By making the pending notification performance executable during a jackpot, it is possible to increase the interest during a jackpot.

Note that in this example, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) The variation time of the first main game symbol related to a loss in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 100 is also the first main game symbol related to a loss in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 1. The fluctuation time is also relatively short (for example, 1 second, and no advance notice performance is executed), and the first main hit related to the jackpot or small win in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 100. The variation time of the game symbols and the variation time of the first main game symbol related to a jackpot or small win in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 1 are relatively long (for example, 30 seconds, and As a preview performance, the win/fail provocation performance A is executed and is successful), and the above tendency is achieved regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (losses, jackpots, small wins),
(2) When the number of time reductions is 100, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to a loss in the time reduction gaming state is relatively short (for example, 1 second, and no preview effect is executed). Yes, when the number of time reductions is 100, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to a jackpot or small win in the time reduction game state is relatively long (for example, 30 seconds, and it is appropriate or not as a preview performance. The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to a loss in the time reduction game state when the number of time reductions is 1 is relatively long (for example, 60 seconds). , In addition, as a preview performance, win/fail inciting performance A is executed and fails, a performance suggesting that the second main game side holds is executed, and the second main game side holds the second main game side. When the maximum number of holds is reached, the occurrence completion effect is executed), and the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to the jackpot or small hit in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 100 is relatively long ( For example, it is 30 seconds, and as a preview performance, the win/fail excitement performance A is executed and is successful), and the above tendency is achieved regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side (both losses and jackpots are small). Hit too),
(3) The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to a loss in the non-time reduction gaming state is relatively long (for example, 45 seconds), and the winning/failure inciting performance B is executed as a preview performance and fails. ), and the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to the jackpot or small win in the non-time reduction gaming state is relatively long (for example, 45 seconds, and the production is hit/fail inciting B → success). Yes, the above tendency does not depend on the number of reservations on the second main game side (losses, jackpots, small wins),
It should be noted that the success/failure stirring performance A and the winning/failure stirring performance B are different in presentation form (for example, the winning/failure stirring performance A is a battle performance, and the winning/failure stirring performance B is a mission performance). In addition, as for the variation time of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state, there are four types of variation time: 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds in the case of symbol variation related to a loss, and symbols related to a jackpot or small hit. In the case of fluctuations, there are three types: 15 seconds, 35 seconds, and 65 seconds, and among the four types of fluctuation times for losses, the shorter the time value, the easier it is to select, and for the fluctuation time for jackpots or small hits, among the three types. The longer the time value, the more likely it is to be selected, and regarding the variable time related to losing, when the number of pending items on the first main game side is 0 to 1, three types of variable times other than 3 seconds are selected as the variable time, and When the number of reservations is 2 to 3, all four types are selected, and for the variable time related to the jackpot or small win, the above three types can be selected regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. good.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, there is only one time saving counter, and the counter value is subtracted depending on the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol. Although the time saving game state is configured to end when the total number of fluctuations with the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined value, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving number counter α and the time saving number counter are used as the time saving number counter. The time saving number counter α subtracts the counter value depending on the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol, and the time saving number counter β subtracts the counter value based on the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol. It may be configured such that the counter value is subtracted only by the fluctuation, and the time reduction gaming state ends when either the counter value of the time reduction number counter α or the time reduction number counter β becomes 0. That is, either the total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined value, or the number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol reaches a specific value. It may be configured such that the time-saving gaming state is ended by . In addition, the time saving number may be referred to as the final number, and the final number is configured to have a first final number and a second final number, and when the jackpot is executed due to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, the final number is the final number. The first final number becomes the final number, a small hit is executed by the small winning symbol being stopped and displayed, and if a jackpot is executed by entering the V winning hole during the small winning, the second final number is determined. If configured so that is the final count,
(1) Let the probability of winning a jackpot (jackpot symbol) before the first final period number of symbol changes are executed be X,
If the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot symbol) before the second final period number of symbol changes is executed is Y, then "X≦Y".
(2) Let the probability of winning a small hit before the first final number of symbol changes are executed be X,
If the probability of winning a small hit before the second final period number of symbol changes is executed is Y, then "X≦Y".
(3) Let the probability of winning a small hit that makes it relatively easy for the ball to enter the V winning hole by the time the first final number of symbol changes are executed be X,
It is configured so that "X≦Y", where Y is the probability of winning a small hit that makes it relatively easy for the ball to enter the V winning hole before the second final period number of symbol changes are executed. You may.
Further, in the above configuration, X and Y may be compared by setting the symbol fluctuations only to the symbol fluctuations on the first main game side and the jackpots and small hits only to the jackpots and small hits on the first main game side, or X and Y may be compared by considering only the symbol fluctuations on the second main game side, and assuming that the jackpot and small hit are only the jackpot and small hit on the second main game side.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, if a jackpot (jackpot symbol) on the first main game side is won in the non-time reduction gaming state, the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends is 60%. , the upper limit of the number of reservations on the second main game side is 4, and the second main game side is configured so that the small hit winning rate (probability of winning a small hit with one symbol change) is 20%. In other words, the small win winning rate on the second main game side is less than the ratio of transitioning to the time saving gaming state after the jackpot ends when a jackpot is won on the first main game side in the non-time saving gaming state. Alternatively, the small win winning rate on the second main game side is such that when a jackpot is won on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, the transition to the time reduction gaming state occurs after the jackpot ends. It may be configured such that the ratio is greater than or equal to . In addition, the final number of times after the jackpot won in the time-reduced gaming state or after the jackpot triggered by the small hit is the first final number, and the number of times after the jackpot won in the non-time-reduced gaming state or after the jackpot triggered by the small hit is the first number. The final number of times after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be the second final number of times, or the configuration regarding the above-mentioned time saving number of times may be combined as appropriate.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of second main game reserved balls is set to "1". ”, but the configuration is not limited to this. Regarding the case where the upper limit number of second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than "1", only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below as a first modification from the fourth embodiment.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) in FIG. 65 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the changes from the third modification example of the second embodiment will be described in detail. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 1332 (fourth change 1), that is, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the second main game starting port B10 (the second main game starting port If it is determined that the second main game starting entrance ball entry information has been received from the ball entry detection device B11s, in step 1332 (fourth variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the held ball on the second main game side. is within the upper limit (in this example, the upper limit for reservation on the second main game side is two). If Yes in step 1332 (fourth change 1), the process moves to step 1333, and if No in step 1332 (fourth change 1), the process moves to step 1333.

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of main game tables 1 and 2 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a small win on the second main game side is lower (probability of 411/1024) than in the fourth embodiment. Furthermore, as the small winning symbol on the first main game side, it is easier to win "2AK" and harder to win "7AK" than in the fourth embodiment. In addition, when a jackpot is executed due to a small win on the second main game side, the number of rounds executed for the jackpot is only one type, 13R (the total number of rounds executed when the small win is 1R). There is. Here, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot symbol on the first main game side stops and the jackpot is executed, the jackpot symbol that shifts to the time reduction game state after the jackpot ends is "5A・7A". Therefore, when the jackpot symbols on the first main game side stop, the ratio of shifting to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends is "524/1024". On the other hand, when a jackpot is executed triggered by a small win on the first main game side, the small winning symbol that causes the transition to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends is "7AK", and the small win on the first main game side The ratio of transitioning to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the jackpot triggered by a hit is "824/1024", and on the first main game side, the small winning symbol is smaller than when the jackpot symbol stops and the jackpot is executed. It is configured such that the rate of transition to the time-saving game state after the jackpot ends is relatively high when the jackpot is executed using the small win related to the small win pattern as an opportunity after stopping. Incidentally, the number of rounds to be executed when executing the jackpot triggered by the stop of the jackpot symbol on the second main game side may be only 12 rounds (regardless of whether it is 4B, 5B, or 7B).

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, it is notified that there is a hold that will result in a small win in the hold, as in the fourth embodiment. By making the small hit pending notification performance possible during a jackpot, it is possible to increase the interest during a jackpot, and on the first main game side, the jackpot is smaller than the jackpot that is executed due to the stoppage of the jackpot symbol. Since the system is configured such that the transition rate to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot is higher when the jackpot is triggered by a hit, for example, if the jackpot symbol on the first main game side stops in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if there is a hold that becomes a small win on the first main game side during the jackpot being executed, the small hit hold notification performance is executed, so that the player can receive a high profit. This will make the game even more interesting.

(Example 2 of change from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of second main game reserved balls is set to "1". ”, but the configuration is not limited to this. Regarding the case where the upper limit number of second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than "1", only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below as a second modification from the fourth embodiment.

First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 16 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 1785-7 (fourth variation 2), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is not the first main game symbol in step 1785-5. , In step 1785-7 (fourth variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times C (in this example, two times) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and moves to step 1785-8. do. In addition, in the second modification from the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is two, which is the same value as the predetermined number of times C.

Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 74 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2320 (fourth variation 2) and step 2650 (fourth variation 2). That is, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the symbol content determination permission flag. After turning off, in step 2320 (fourth change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state). If Yes in step 2320 (fourth change 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves to step 2306. Further, in the case of No in step 2320 (fourth change 2), in step 2650 (fourth change 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a time-saving performance content determination process, which will be described later, and moves to step 2308. do.

Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the time-saving production content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2650 (fourth variation 2) in FIG. 80 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols related to the symbol variation based on the information regarding the stop symbols of the main game symbols. Next, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol fluctuation is a short-time fluctuation (in this example, a symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds). Here, in the second modification from the fourth embodiment, as the variation time of the main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, there is a short-time variation that is a variation time of 10 seconds, and a medium-time variation that is a variation time of 30 seconds. The configuration is such that three types of variation time can be selected: 1, and a long-time variation of 60 seconds. The configuration of the variable time in the time reduction gaming state may be changed, for example, it may be set to only one type of 10 seconds, or the average value of the variable time may be set to a short time (eg, 7 seconds, etc.).

If Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the variation mode of the decorative pattern related to the symbol variation in the first half: "5 seconds variation → temporary stop", in the second half: "5 seconds variation → stop". ” is decided as two pseudo-runs. Here, in the second modification example from the fourth embodiment, when a variation of a decorative pattern that is a short-time variation is executed, a pattern variation that is actually executed once every 10 seconds is replaced with a pseudo variation of 5 seconds. By executing the above twice (the stopped symbols in the latter half of the symbol fluctuations are fixed stopped symbols), it is an effect that makes it appear to the player as if the symbol fluctuations with a 5-second variation time are being executed twice. (See the time-saving image at the bottom of the figure). Next, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the performance content related to the symbol variation: the first half: "performance content suggesting the variation time of symbol variation after the second half of the variation", the second half: "Next". It is determined that the performance content suggests the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations after the fluctuation, and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2308). Incidentally, the variation time of the symbol variation after the second half of the variation is the variation time of the second half of the variation, or the variation time of the symbol variation after the next variation. In this way, when executing a short-time variation in the time-saving gaming state, the validity result related to the currently executed variation state (which symbol variation is it, and whether it is in the first half or the second half) In other words, the effect that suggests the change time of the symbol change after the current one (including the second half of the symbol change if it is currently in the first half) will not be executed (for example, whether it will be a reach or not) A performance that stirs up excitement) will be carried out.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation is a medium time fluctuation (symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) in step 2662. do. If Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the variation mode of the decorative pattern related to the symbol variation in the first half: "5 seconds variation → temporary stop", in the second half: "(5 seconds variation → It is determined that the pseudo-sequential development has failed, resulting in a "stop (determined stop)" after executing "temporary stop" multiple times. In this way, when a medium time variation symbol variation is executed in the time reduction gaming state, after executing the same variation mode as the short time variation symbol variation described above, the short time variation symbol variation is executed. At the stop timing related to the variation, the special symbol (temporary stop symbol that will cause the subsequent pseudo variation to be executed) temporarily stops, and after repeating the pseudo variation multiple times, the losing symbol is fixed and stops without becoming a reach. It is configured to fluctuate in such a manner. Next, in step 2666, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the performance contents related to the symbol fluctuation in the first half: "performance content suggesting the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations after the second half of the fluctuation", in the second half: "the The process then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In addition, if No in step 2662, in other words,
If the symbol variation is a long-term variation (a symbol variation with a variation time of 60 seconds), in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the variation mode of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation to the first half: "5 seconds fluctuation → temporary stop", second half: "After executing (5 seconds fluctuation → temporary stop) multiple times, perform reach fluctuation and stop (determined stop)" is determined to be a successful pseudo continuous development. In this way, when a medium time variation symbol variation is executed in the time reduction gaming state, after executing the same variation mode as the short time variation symbol variation described above, the short time variation symbol variation is executed. At the stop timing related to the variation, the special symbol (temporary stop symbol that will cause the subsequent pseudo variation to be executed) temporarily stops, and after repeating the pseudo variation multiple times, the losing symbol is fixed and stops without becoming a reach. It is configured to fluctuate in such a manner. Next, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the performance content related to the symbol variation in the first half: "performance content that suggests the variation time of symbol variation after the second half of the variation"; in the second half: "the content The process then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In this way, when a medium time variation or a long variation time symbol variation is executed in the time reduction gaming state, in the first half, the symbol variation later than the current one (currently in the first half) is similar to the short time variation. If there is, a production that suggests the variation time (including the second half of the symbol variation) (for example, a production that incites whether or not it will be a reach) will be executed, but in the second half, it will not be possible to determine whether the variation is correct or not. It is configured to execute a performance that suggests the result (for example, a performance that suggests the expected jackpot of the symbol change). In this way, during symbol fluctuations in short fluctuations and in the first half of symbol fluctuations in medium fluctuations or long fluctuations, symbol fluctuations after the current one (if it is currently in the first half, include the second half of the symbol fluctuation) It is configured such that a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect, that suggests the variation time is executed for each variation, and in the latter half of a symbol change in a medium or long change, a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect, that suggests the correctness or failure of the change is executed. A performance that is not a performance will be performed. In addition, in this example, the second half of the medium-time variation and long-term variation is configured to execute "performance content that suggests the validity of the relevant variation"; The period for executing the "Contents" is not limited to this, for example, after the timing when the short fluctuation time ends, that is, the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation of the medium fluctuation time or long fluctuation time, the period for executing the "contents" is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute "performance content that suggests the validity of the results." In addition, "performance content that suggests the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations related to the latter half of the fluctuation" that is executed in the first half of symbol fluctuations with short fluctuation time is configured to be executed every time a pseudo fluctuation is executed. There is no need to do this, and depending on the pseudo fluctuation, it may be configured such that there are cases in which "performance content suggesting the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations related to the latter half of the fluctuation concerned" is executed and cases in which it is not performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always execute a performance that targets symbol fluctuations with relatively high jackpot expectations (long-term symbol fluctuations, symbol fluctuations in which a reach effect is executed), and multiple previews. This makes it possible to prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to judge which effect indicating the degree of expectation for a symbol change is being executed due to the combination of effects and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, when a symbol variation other than a short variation is executed during the time reduction gaming state, "Pseudo variation (5 seconds) → Pseudo variation (5 seconds) → Execute pseudo variation 4 times ( 5 seconds x 4 times) → Determined stop in case of medium variation, reach in case of long variation", but it is not limited to this, "pseudo variation (5 seconds) → pseudo variation (5 seconds) Seconds) → Reach → Execute a pseudo fluctuation in which the reaching symbol temporarily stops 4 times (5 seconds x 4 times) In symbol fluctuations other than short fluctuations, the symbol becomes reachable 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and then multiple times. It may be configured such that pseudo fluctuation (temporary stop) is executed twice. When configured in this way, it may be configured such that the greater the number of pseudo fluctuations (temporary stops) after becoming a reach, the higher the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation. Further, the super reach may be configured to be executed after a plurality of pseudo fluctuations after the reach.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine in the second modification example from the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is set to a plurality (two), and the second main game side By configuring the number of time reductions when moving to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends as 2 times, you can win the small hit again in the time reduction gaming state when you move to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends ( It is possible to increase the possibility that a symbol change related to a hold that occurs in a time-reduced gaming state (including the case where it is executed in a non-time-reduced gaming state) can be made. In addition, when moving to the time reduction game state after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side, the number of time reductions is only two times, but by configuring the pseudo fluctuation to be executed multiple times, one symbol fluctuation It is possible to make it appear as if the symbol changes are being executed multiple times, and the player feels as if the lottery is being executed multiple times (for example, 10 times) in a time-saving gaming state, which shortens the time. It can feel like it is easy to win a jackpot in a gaming state.

In addition, in the second modification from the fourth embodiment, after the jackpot on the second main game side ends (including both the jackpot triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbol and the jackpot triggered by the small hit), Although the configuration is such that all of the transitions are made to the time-saving gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases in which the transition is made to the non-time-saving gaming state and cases in which the transition is made to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side. The probability of winning a small hit or a jackpot in the time reduction gaming state can be adjusted by adjusting the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends on the second main game side. For example, depending on the game state in which a small win is won on the second main game side, the rate of transition to the time-reduction game state after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win may be configured to be different.

In addition, configurations that can be applied to gaming machines in which a jackpot is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole during a small hit, including the second modification from the fourth embodiment, are listed below. do.
(1) The proportion of the second main game player who won in the time reduction gaming state to shift to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot is triggered by a small win and the second main game player who won in the non-time reduction gaming state. The rate of transition to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the jackpot triggered by a small hit may be different, and the time reduction after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win on the second main game side that won in the time reduction gaming state. Even if the configuration is such that the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the end of a jackpot triggered by a small win on the second main game side won in the non-time reduction gaming state is higher than the ratio of transitioning to the gaming state. good. With such a configuration, even if the chance of winning a small win on the second main game side after the time reduction game state ends is reduced, it will be unilaterally disadvantageous even if the chance to shift to the time reduction game state is reduced. It is possible to make the gameplay more enjoyable.
(2) The proportion of the second main game player who won in the time reduction gaming state to shift to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot is triggered by a small win and the second main game player who won in the non-time reduction gaming state. The rate of transition to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the jackpot triggered by a small hit may be different, and the time reduction after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win on the second main game side that won in the time reduction gaming state. Even if the configuration is such that the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the end of a jackpot triggered by a small win on the second main game side won in the non-time reduction gaming state is lower than the ratio of transitioning to the gaming state. good. With such a configuration, it is advantageous to win a small win at an early stage, such as simply winning a small win on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state, and easily transitioning to the time reduction gaming state. It can be used as a game feature.
(3) The probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit in the time-reduced gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot after the time-reducing gaming state has ended and with any remaining reservations on the second main game side. If the probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit is designed to be somewhat similar to the probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small win in the time-reduced gaming state is After the time-saving gaming state has ended, and if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit in the remaining hold on the second main game side, It is preferable to set the number of times<the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side.''The probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit in the time-reduced game state is higher than that in the time-reduced game state. If the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than the probability of winning a jackpot triggered by a small hit on the remaining hold on the second main game side, then It is preferable to set the limit to the maximum number of reservations on the gaming side.

(Example 3 of change from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is configured. I explained in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the performance on the side of the sub-control board S that can be executed in a gaming machine having such a configuration will be described as modification example 3 from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be explained in detail.

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 65 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1237-1 (fourth variation 3), step 1237-2 (fourth variation 3), and step 1241 (fourth variation 3), that is, step In step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, and then in step 1237-1 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the main game time saving flag. is on. If Yes in step 1237-1 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the electric accessory release start command (second main game starting opening electric role) in step 1237-2 (fourth change 3). This is a command to the effect that the release of object B11d has started, and is a command to the sub-control board S side) is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1238. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1237-1 (fourth change 3), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1300). Further, in step 1240, after the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, in step 1241 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the electric accessory B11d. An opening completion command (a command indicating that the opening of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d has been completed, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process moves to step 1242. In addition, in the third modification from the fourth embodiment, the opening period from when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d starts opening until it ends opening is 5 seconds, and the specific second The opening mode of the main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "1.0 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open → closed" . In addition, in the third modification example from the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is 1, and the number of time reductions when shifting to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side is 1 time. It becomes. The opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is not limited to this, but in order to further ensure ease of ball entry, the opening mode is "1.0 seconds open → 6.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open → 6.0 seconds closed →1. Open for 0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Open for 1.0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Open for 1.0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Open for 1.0 seconds → Close, etc. It may also be an open mode in which the closed period is longer than the closed period.

Next, FIG. 83 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 3 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the change from the fourth embodiment is that the selection tendency of the variation time of the main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state has been changed, and in the third modification example from the fourth embodiment, The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is relatively longer than that in the fourth embodiment. Specifically, it is configured to fluctuate for a long time of 30 seconds both at the time of winning and at the time of loss. , the variation time of the first main game symbol related to a loss is all configured to be a short variation of 1 second. In addition, in the second main game symbol, regardless of whether there is a hit loss or a time reduction game state, all the fluctuation times are 30 seconds, that is, all are long fluctuation times, so the time reduction game Even when the second main game symbol fluctuates in the state, and later, when the second main game symbol fluctuates due to the expiration of the hold on the second main game side in the non-time reduction game state, it is considered as a long fluctuation time, It is configured so that the time for performing the performance can be secured. With this configuration, it is possible to make the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol, which is important in winning consecutive wins, long, so that the performance related to consecutive winnings can be carefully shown to the player. In addition, if the number of time reductions is configured to be 100 times and 1 time, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of a loss in the time reduction gaming state in the case of 1 time reduction is 30 seconds. In the case of 100 time savings, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of a loss in the time reduction gaming state may be configured to be 1 second (in the case of 100 time savings, a small hit during the time reduction gaming state Since it is easy to win, there is no problem even if the fluctuation time is short).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the V winning prize detection performance display control process related to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2460 (fourth variation 3) to step 2465 (fourth variation 3), that is, in step 2460 (fourth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is It is determined whether the right-handed instruction flag (the flag that is turned on when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d starts opening in the time reduction game state) is off. If Yes in step 2460 (fourth change 3), in step 2461 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S receives the electric accessory release start command {step 1237-2 ( It is determined whether the command set in the fourth change 3) and sent to the sub-control board S side has been received. If Yes in step 2461 (4th change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-handed instruction flag in step 2462 (4th change 3), and moves to step 2463 (4th change 3). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2460 (fourth variation 3), the process moves to step 2463 (fourth variation 3). Next, in step 2463 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S is set at a timing a predetermined time before the symbol fluctuation stop timing of the symbol fluctuation in the time reduction gaming state (for example, 5 seconds before the symbol fluctuation stop timing). (timing) is reached. If Yes in step 2463 (fourth change 3), in step 2464 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S performs a right-handed execution instruction production (launching a game ball to the second main game starting port B10). This is an effect that prompts the player to, for example, an effect that displays "Right now" on the effect display device SG). (In the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the command is set on the sub-sub control unit SS side. ), and the process moves to step 2466 (fourth change 3). If the answer is No in step 2463 (fourth change 3), then in step 2465 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S performs a right-hand hitting prohibition instruction performance (prompting the player to stop firing the game ball). For example, a command related to an effect that displays "Do not fire now" on the effect display device SG is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ) and moves to step 2466 (fourth change 3).

Next, in step 2466 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received an electric accessory opening end command from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2466 (fourth variation 3), in step 2467 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is in a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2467 (fourth change 3), in step 2468 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S determines which of the right-handed hitting execution instruction performance and right-handed hitting prohibition instruction performance is executed. Set a command to erase the display related to. Next, in step 2469 (fourth change 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting instruction flag, and proceeds to step 2456. Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 2461 (fourth variation 3), step 2466 (fourth variation 3), or step 2467 (fourth variation 3), the process moves to step 2456.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the fourth embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state, in a situation where it is thought that a hold on the second main game side is occurring, A situation in which it is considered that there is a case where a hit prohibition instruction performance is executed and no hold is occurring on the second main game side, that is, a long-term fluctuation of 30 seconds in the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in a time-reduced gaming state. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the hold on the auxiliary game side will be lost during the fluctuation time, the right-handed execution instruction performance should be executed 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the second main game symbol stops for a long period of time. By configuring this, a hold on the auxiliary game side will occur, and due to the hold on the auxiliary game side, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d will be opened, so the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d will be opened. Even after the fluctuation of the 2nd main game symbol has finished and the state has entered the non-time saving game state, the 2nd main game starting port electric accessory B11d continues to be opened, and the hold on the 2nd main game side is again suspended. It is possible to configure the system so that the time for the occurrence of the problem can be guaranteed.

(Example 4 of modification from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is configured. I explained in detail. Here, an example of another configuration applicable to the gaming machine having such a configuration is referred to as modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 65 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, that is, when the game state is the time reduction game state (the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), When the winning symbol "D1" stops as the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "1.0 second open → 1.0 second closed → 2.0 second open" →Closed'', and the opening period from when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d starts opening until it finishes opening is 4 seconds.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of steps 1400(1) and (2) in FIG. 8 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. . The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1447-1 (fourth variation 4) and step 1450 (fourth variation 4), that is, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M is After determining the stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the random numbers and the winning/fail lottery results (see main game table 2), in step 1447-1 (fourth change 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency flag. (In the fourth modification example from the fourth embodiment, there is only one type of limited frequency state, so the flag that is turned on in the limited frequency state is the limited frequency flag.) Determine whether or not the flag is off. do. If Yes in step 1447-1 (fourth change), the CPUMC of the main control board M moves to step 1444-1 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1447-1 (fourth change 4), in step 1450 (fourth change 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and in step 1418 to move to.

Next, FIG. 87 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 3 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. In the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the main game symbols at the time of loss in the time reduction game state is determined to be one type of only 5 seconds. Further, in the time reduction game state, the variation time at the time of winning is determined from two types, 10 seconds and 60 seconds. Here, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of loss in the time reduction game state is 5 seconds, which is longer than the 4 seconds that is the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d mentioned above. ing. In addition, the shortest variation time of the first main game symbol at the time of loss in the time reduction gaming state is 10 seconds, which is 4 seconds, which is the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. It is longer than that. The variation time of the main game symbols in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment may be the same as the structure of the third modification from the fourth embodiment described above. Also, in the subsequent embodiments, the structure of the variation time of the main game symbols may be the same as the structure of the third modification from the fourth embodiment described above.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth variation 4) in FIG. 86 in modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1470, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols (refer to the limited frequency table) based on the main game side random numbers and the win/fail lottery result. Next, in step 1471, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1472, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency flag in step 1473, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1418). Note that even in the case of No in step 1472, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 89 is an example of a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table in modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment. In the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table, the variation time of the second main game symbol at the time of a loss is relatively short. The configuration is such that only one type is determined for a certain one second.

Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 16 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1786-1 (fourth variation 4) and step 1786-2 (fourth variation 4), that is, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M After setting the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A (100 times in this example), in step 1786-1 (fourth change 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. The value is set to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in step 1786-2 (fourth change 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency flag, and proceeds to step 1785-8. In this manner, in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, when the time reduction game state is entered after the jackpot on the first main game side ends, the system is configured to shift to the limited frequency state.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine in the fourth modification example from the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of a loss in the time reduction game state is changed to the second main game start opening electric By configuring the release period to be longer than the opening period of the accessory B11d, "after the jackpot on the second main game side ends, the time reduction game state will be entered, and the number of pending items on the second main game side will change from 0 to the second 2. Main game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened → 0.5 seconds later, one second main game hold is generated → The hold on the second main game side is exhausted and the second main game symbols start to fluctuate → 3. The opening of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d ends after 5 seconds → The second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d opens again after 0.5 seconds → The fluctuation of the second main game symbol ends after 1 second After the jackpot ends, by the time the time reduction game state is entered and the fluctuation of the second main game symbols is finished, By starting to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d for the second time counting from , the second main game symbol can be changed three times even if the time saving number is one. , it is possible to increase the expectation level after winning a jackpot. In addition, by configuring the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol at the time of loss in the time reduction gaming state to be shorter than the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, the second main game Unlike the structure of the symbols, even if the first main game symbol is changed when the time reduction game state is entered after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side, the first main game symbol will not change until the first main game symbol changes. It is not possible to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d again, and if the player intentionally changes the first main game symbol and causes the second main game to be held on the original game It can be structured so that profits that go against the flow are not obtained. In addition, when the time reduction game state is entered after the jackpot related to the first main game side ends, the number of time reduction times becomes 100, and by moving to the limited frequency state, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is This is a relatively short time of 1 second. If the variation time of the second main game symbol is long when the time saving number is 100, it is almost certain that you can win the small hit on the second main game side in the time saving game state. It takes time to win the small win on the main game side, which slows down the tempo of the game, but with this configuration, if the number of times saved is 100, the second main game The variation time of game symbols can be shortened, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo in accordance with the game situation.

In addition, in the fourth modification example from the fourth embodiment, when a player wins a small hit on the second main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state, and a ball enters the V winning hole during the execution of the small win, In the case where the time reduction gaming state is entered after the end of the jackpot to be executed, for the first variation of the time reduction gaming state (the first symbol variation after the jackpot ends), the symbol related to the loss of the first main game symbol It may be configured such that the variation time is relatively longer in the case of a symbol variation related to a loss of the second main game symbol than in the case of a variation.

(Example 5 of modification from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is configured. I explained in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the performance on the side of the sub-control board S that can be executed in a gaming machine having such a configuration will be described as modification example 5 from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be explained in detail.

Next, FIG. 91 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. In the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, the small winning symbols on the second main game side include "3BK" and "7BK", and when the small winning symbol is won on the second main game side, is configured so that it is easy to win "3BK" (950/1024). Here, the number of rounds to execute a jackpot triggered by a small win on the second main game side is 16 rounds (small hit The number of rounds executed is the sum of the rounds executed in 1 round), but the number of time reductions after the jackpot ends is whether the jackpot was triggered by "3BK" or "7BK". It is configured differently depending on the

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 16 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1785-5 (fourth variation 5) to step 1786-5 (fourth variation 5), that is, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M However, after determining that the stop symbol is a time-saving jackpot symbol (it is a jackpot symbol that shifts to a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in this example, it is "4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B"), or In step 1785-4, if the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game triggered by the time-saving small winning symbol (in this example, 7AK) has ended, step 1785-5 (fourth change 5 ), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped symbol is the first main game symbol. If Yes in step 1785-5 (4th change 5), in step 1786-1 (4th change 5), CPUMC of main control board M is checked after the jackpot won in the non-time saving gaming state has ended. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1786-1 (fourth change 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A (in this example, , 100 times) and proceeds to step 1785-8. On the other hand, if No in step 1786-1 (fourth change 5), in step 1786-3 (fourth change 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times B (main In the example, 1 time) is set, and the process moves to step 1785-8. In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-5 (fourth change 5), in other words, when the stopped symbol is the second main game symbol, in step 1786-4 (fourth change 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M is is the second main game long time-saving small winning symbol (after the execution of the special game, a transition to the time-saving game state and a relatively long time-saving number (in this example, 100 times) will be given. This is the small winning symbol on the second main game side that triggers the transition to the special game, and in this example, it is determined whether or not the special game triggered by "7BK" has ended. If Yes in step 1786-4 (fourth change 5), in step 1786-5 (fourth change 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A (in this example, , 100 times) and proceeds to step 1785-8. In this way, in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, after the jackpot on the first main game side ends, a jackpot triggered by a small win won in a non-time saving gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state In this case, the player wins a jackpot, and when the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot ends (at the time of the first win on the first main game side), the number of time-savings becomes 100. In addition, on the second main game side, after the jackpot executed with the second main game long time saving small winning symbol (in this example, "7BK") as a trigger, the number of time saving times becomes 100, and in other cases (big hit After the end of the jackpot triggered by the stoppage of the symbols and after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small hit), the number of time reductions becomes one. That is, the second main game length time saving small winning symbol (in this example, "7BK") is the highest profit small winning symbol. In addition, a jackpot triggered by a jackpot or a small hit triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbol on the first main game side, and a jackpot triggered by a jackpot or small hit triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbol on the second main game side. When compared with The expected value of the number of game balls acquired in a jackpot (the number of rounds executed) is smaller than that.

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth variation 5) in FIG. 23 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2586-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of rounds and the number of prizes in numbers (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the CPUSC sends it to the sub-sub control unit SS side). be done) Next, in step 2586-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the jackpot being executed is the second main game long time shortening small winning symbol (the small winning symbol on the second main game side, and is triggered by the said small winning). It is the most profitable small winning symbol that is given a relatively long time saving number after the end of the jackpot, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot triggered by 7BK). In the case of Yes in step 2586-2, in step 2586-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board A command to execute a performance to bless someone is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). In addition, if No in step 2586-2, CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 2586-4 is a normal performance (a performance that does not notify that a relatively long time saving number of times will be given; A command is set to execute the special in-game effect at the time of the game, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). In this way, in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, the jackpot is triggered by the second main game length shortening small winning symbol (in this example, 7BK), which is the small winning symbol that provides the highest profit for the player. During execution, the game is configured to perform a long-term shortening effect to bless the player.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, there are two types of time reduction times, 1 time and 100 times, as the number of time reductions when transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the end of the jackpot. After the jackpot triggered by the second main game long time-saving small winning symbol (in this example, 7BK), which is the small winning symbol with the highest profit for the player, the number of time-savings becomes 100. It was configured as follows. In addition, the second main game long time shortening small winning symbol is configured to be selected at "74/1024" when a small winning is won on the second main game side, and it is not often selected even during a series of games. Therefore, when the second main game long time saving small winning symbol is won and a jackpot is executed using the small winning symbol as a trigger, the game is It is designed so that participants can feel a sense of accomplishment.

In addition, in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, the player is congratulated by executing the long time shortening effect during the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Execute the long time shortening performance at the jackpot start demo time (or jackpot end demo time) triggered by the game long time shortening small winning symbol, (2) The plan to win the second main game long time shortening small winning symbol is suspended. Notify that there is a hold in the hold that is scheduled to win the second main game long time shortening small winning symbol in a performance during loss fluctuation in a situation where the hold is in hold (notify as a look-ahead effect) ,(3
) 2nd main game length During the symbol change after the end of the jackpot triggered by the time-saving small winning symbol (if the number of time-savings is 1 or 100 times, it is desirable to execute with the first symbol change after the end of the jackpot) (4) A jackpot triggered by the second main game length time reduction small winning symbol during symbol fluctuations related to the second main game length time reduction small winning symbol. It may be configured to notify that the number of time reductions after the end is 100.

(Example 6 of change from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning hole C27 during a small winning game, and the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is configured. I explained in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the performance on the side of the sub-control board S that can be executed in a gaming machine having such a configuration will be described as modification example 6 from the fourth embodiment, and will be described below as modification example 6 from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be explained in detail.

First, FIG. 94 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. In the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, it is easier to win a small win on the first main game side than in the fourth embodiment. By configuring this way, the details will be described later, but if you win a small hit on the first main game side in the non-time saving game state, you can prevent the game ball from entering the V winning hole C27. It achieves the kind of gameplay you're aiming for. It should be noted that it may be configured such that even if the player wins a small win on the second main game side, a performance that instructs the player to aim for the game ball to enter the V winning hole C27 may be executed.

Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process related to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) in FIG. 65 in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 3082-1 (fourth change 6) to step 3082-6 (fourth change 6), that is, in step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M The opening pattern of the second grand prize opening C20 (in this example, for example, in the case of 2AK, it is "open for 0.2 seconds → closed", and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening C20, Even if the ball enters the second big winning hole C20, it will not enter the V winning hole C27, and in all other small winning symbols, it will be "2 seconds open → 4 seconds closed → 2 seconds open → closed". , if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big prize opening C20, a plurality of game balls enter the second big prize opening C20), then step 3082-1 (Fourth variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit start demonstration flag (the flag that turns on when it is the small winning start demonstration time). Next, in step 3082-2 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) to the small winning start demonstration time timer KKt, and starts the small winning start demonstration time timer KKt. -Move to 3 (change 4 6). Next, in step 3082-3 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game long opening small winning symbol (the second major winning opening C20 on the first main game side becomes long opening). It is a small winning symbol, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a small winning related to 7AK). If Yes in step 3082-3 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a small winning start demonstration start command (a command to the sub-control board side) in step 3082-4 (fourth change 6). Yes, a command to the effect that the small winning start demo time has started is set, and the process moves to step 3082-5 (fourth change 6). In addition, if No in step 3082-3 (fourth change 6), or if CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the small hit execution flag is off in step 3060, step 3082-5 (fourth change Move on to change 6). Next, in step 3082-5 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the small winning start demonstration time timer KKt is 0 or not. If Yes in step 3082-5 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small winning start demonstration flag in step 3082-6 (fourth change 6), and moves to step 3056. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 3082-5 (fourth change 6), the process moves to the next process {the process of step 3100 (fourth)). As described above, in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, as the small winning symbol on the first main game side, the small winning symbol (2AK ) and a small winning symbol (7AK) that makes it easy to enter the second big prize opening C20.

Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the V win detection performance display control process related to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2466-1 (fourth variation 6) to step 2466-10 (fourth variation 6), that is, in step 2466-1 (fourth variation 6), The CPUMC of the sub-control board S determines whether the firing instruction production flag (a flag that is turned on when the firing instruction production timer HSt is counting time) is off. If Yes in step 2466-1 (fourth change 6), in step 2466-2 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S receives a small winning start demo start command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466-2 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S causes a right-hand batting preparation display (for example, "audio Set the command to execute the message "Hit the right hand according to the cursor." Next, in step 2466-4 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (15 seconds in this example) in the firing instruction production timer (decrement timer) and starts. Here, the predetermined time set in the firing instruction production timer HSt is the period from the start timing of the small hit start demo time to 1 second before the second release timing of the small hit excluding "2AK", “Small hit start demo time (10 seconds) + first opening time of the second big winning opening C20 in the small winning (2 seconds) + small winning from the first opening end timing of the second big winning opening C20 in the small winning The closing time (1 second) up to the timing 3 seconds before the second opening start of the second big prize opening C20 is 15 seconds.

Next, in step 2466-5 (fourth variation 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the small win demonstration performance flag, and the process moves to step 2466-6 (fourth variation 6). Note that even in the case of No in step 2466-1 (fourth variation 6), the process moves to step 2466-6 (fourth variation 6). Next, in step 2466-6 (fourth change 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the timer value of the firing instruction performance timer HSt to the first performance execution value (the first firing command performance is executed). (in this example, 6 seconds). If Yes in step 2466-6 (fourth change 6), in step 2466-7 (fourth change 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute the firing instruction performance, and in step 2466-8 (Move on to 4th variation 6). Here, when the firing instruction effect is executed, the speaker D24 outputs the sound "Go" and the effect display device SG displays "GO". That is, while the above-mentioned right-hand batting preparation display is only displayed on the performance display device SG, the firing instruction performance is configured to be displayed on the performance display device SG and output as audio from the speaker D24. In addition, since the game balls fired at the same time as the timing when the firing instruction performance is executed reach the second grand prize opening C20 at the timing before the second grand prize opening C20 opens, the second grand prize opening It is configured so that the balls do not enter C20 (if the game balls are fired continuously from the timing when the firing instruction performance is executed, the second and subsequent game balls may enter the second grand prize opening C20). That is, the game balls launched at the same time as the timing when the firing instruction performance was executed enter the second grand prize opening C20, rather than the time from the timing when the firing instruction performance was executed until the second grand prize opening C20 starts opening. The flow path to the second big prize opening C20 is designed so that the time it takes to reach the second big prize opening C20 is shorter. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 2466-6 (fourth variation 6), the process moves to step 2466-8 (fourth variation 6). Next, in step 2466-8 (fourth change 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the timer value of the firing instruction performance HSt timer to the second performance execution value (the second firing instruction performance is executed). (in this example, 0 seconds). If Yes in step 2466-8 (fourth change 6), in step 2466-9 (fourth change 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute the firing instruction performance. Next, in step 2466-10 (fourth change 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the firing instruction production flag, and proceeds to step 2456. Incidentally, if the result in step 2466-2 (fourth variation 6) or step 2466-8 (fourth variation 6) is No, the process also moves to step 2456. In this way, in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, when a small winning symbol other than "2AK" is won, the right-hand preparation performance and the firing instruction performance can be executed, and the firing The instruction performance is configured so that it can be executed twice for one small winning. In addition, in this example, the configuration is such that the right hit preparation performance and the firing instruction performance can be executed for all small wins other than "2AK", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small win on the first main game side It may be configured to be executed only when the player wins a small win on the second main game side (or only when a small win on the second main game side is won), or only in a non-time saving gaming state (only in a time saving gaming state). ) may be configured to run. In addition, in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, the second grand prize opening C20 is such that even if the game ball is fired toward the second great prize opening C20, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second big prize opening C20. ``2AK'' is provided as the small winning symbol that will cause the small winning that is the opening mode of It is configured. By configuring this way, it is possible to eliminate the need to fire the game ball in the case of a small hit in which the ball does not enter the second large winning hole C20 and the number of balls held decreases even if the game ball is fired, making it user-friendly. It can be made into a gaming machine.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, when a small hit is won on the first main game side in the non-time saving gaming state, the game machine is directed to the second big prize opening C20. By configuring the system to be able to execute a performance (right-handed preparation performance and firing instruction performance) that instructs the user to shoot the game ball with the player's hand, it is possible to execute the performance that instructs the game ball to be fired with 1. Even if you win a small hit on the main game side, you will be notified of the switch to right-handed hitting and the appropriate firing timing to enter the second big winning hole C20, so you will not suffer any disadvantages and it will be smooth. This makes it possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine that allows players to proceed with the game.

In addition, the execution timing of the right-handed preparation performance and the firing instruction performance may be configured to be executed at a timing other than when the second big prize opening C20 is opened during the execution of the small hit, for example, regarding the execution of the small hit. It may be configured to be executed while the second big prize opening C20 is closed while the symbols are changing, during the small winning start demonstration time, or during the small winning execution. In addition, regarding the configuration in which the jackpot is executed by entering the V winning hole during the small hit mentioned above (Fourth Embodiment to Modification Example 6 from the Fourth Embodiment), there is no problem even if the configurations are combined appropriately. do not have.

(Fifth embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a special game, the transition to the probability variable game state is made after the end of the special game, but this is not applicable to the gaming machine of this example. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a fifth embodiment is defined as a configuration with a different gameplay from this embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as exemplified in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the jackpot during a jackpot, the state shifts to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is configured to do this.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 8 in the fifth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the fourth modification example from the similar fourth embodiment will be explained in detail. The difference from Modification Example 4 from the fourth embodiment is that the configuration related to small winnings is deleted because small winnings are not provided. Note that other explanations will be omitted because the configuration is the same as that of the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment.

Next, FIG. 98 is an example of main game tables 1 to 3 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, there is only one type of jackpot symbol "7B" on the second main game side, and the number of rounds executed for the jackpot related to "7B" is "16R". In addition, long open jackpots (jackpots that make it easy to enter the specific area C22) are "3A, 5A, 7A, 7B", and short open jackpots (jackpots that make it difficult to enter the specific area C22) are "2A, 5A, 7A, 7B". In other words, since the second main game side has only long open jackpots, the ratio of long open jackpots in the second main game side's jackpots (the sum of long open jackpots and short open jackpots) is 1 This is higher than the ratio of long open jackpots in the main game side jackpots (the sum of long open jackpots and short open jackpots).

Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth change 4) in FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. The process in the same figure has the same configuration as the limited frequency variation mode determination process in step 1450 (fourth variation 4) in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted, but in the fifth embodiment has one type of limited frequency state.

Next, FIG. 100 is an example of a limited frequency table according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, there is one type of limited frequency state, and the limited frequency table is configured so that it can be referred to in the time reduction gaming state. Also, when compared with the main game table 3 that is referenced in the time reduction gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time is relatively smaller when the limited frequency table is referenced than when the main game table 3 is referenced. It is for a short time. In other words, the selection tendency of the variable time is different when referring to the limited frequency table and when referring to the main game table 3.

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (fifth) in FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. The process in the same figure has the same configuration as the specific game end determination process in step 1550 in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (fifth) in FIG. 16 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1787-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1787-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1787-2. Next, in step 1787-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the variable probability continuous counter MP51c-2 (after winning the special game in the non-probability variable gaming state, and then continuously winning the special game in the probability variable gaming state). Add 1 to the counter value of the counter that measures the number of wins. Next, in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the game state after the end of the special game to a non-probability variable game when the counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches a specified value (in this example, This is the counter value for the state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 4). If Yes in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero in step 1787-5. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1787-1, the process moves to step 1787-5.

Next, in step 1787-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). Next, in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot won in the non-time saving gaming state has ended. If Yes in step 1787-7, in steps 1787-8 and 1787-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c to a predetermined number of times (100 in this example), Turn on the limited frequency flag. Next, in step 1788-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to step 1788-7. If the answer is No in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the sub-control board S side) in step 1788-2, and moves to step 1788-7.

Further, in the case of No in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1788-3. Next, in steps 1788-4 and 1788-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the variable frequency counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (100 in this example), and also sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). A predetermined number of times (100 in this example) is set to the value. Next, in step 1788-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to step 1788-7. Next, in steps 1788-7 and 1788-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and starts the next process (the process of step 1997). Transition. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the number of consecutive wins in the special game in the probability variable game state after winning the special game in the non-probability variable game state, that is, the first win, is one time, After that, each time you win a special game in the probability-variable game state, the number of times you win a special game is counted twice, then three times, and after the special game ends when the number of times you win reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 4 times), the non-probability fluctuation occurs. It is configured to shift to a gaming state (sometimes referred to as a limiter machine). In addition, after the jackpot won in the non-time saving gaming state ends, when moving to the non-probability variable gaming state, the player will move to the limited frequency state, and the "evening stage" will be set as the stay stage. It is configured. In addition, in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state, the "space stage" is set as the stay stage, and when the state shifts to the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot won in the time reduction game state ends, is configured so that the same "space stage" is set as the stay stage. That is, in the case where you win a jackpot in a non-time reduction gaming state and after the jackpot ends, you move to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, and when you are in a probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, the stay stage is different. (performance tendency) and the selection tendency of variable time are configured to be different. Also, in the case where you win a jackpot in the time reduction gaming state and after the jackpot ends, you move to the non-probability variable gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, and in the case where you are in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the staying stage ( It is configured so that the selection tendency of the performance (performance tendency) and the variation time are the same. In addition, when the counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches the specified value (reaches the limiter number of times) and shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends, the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state It is configured so that (it always shifts to the time-saving gaming state). Also, even if you win a jackpot on the first main game side in the time reduction game state and move to the non-probability variable game state and time reduction game state after the jackpot ends, the "Space Stage" will be set as the stay stage. Therefore, the same stay stage as the stay stage in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state is set. It should be noted that the tendency of the performance to be executed is different when the stay stage is the "space stage" and when the stay stage is the "evening stage." That is, there are effects that occur only on the "Space Stage," effects that occur only on the "Evening Stage," and effects that occur on both the "Space Stage" and the "Evening Stage."

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (fifth) in FIG. 19 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2639, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage switching timing {stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when a special game ends (is won), the timing when the game state shifts, This may be the timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the gaming state), or the timing when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state). If Yes in step 2639, in step 2640 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the space stage command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2640, in step 2641, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, if No in step 2640, in step 2642 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the evening stage command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2642, in step 2643, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "evening stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2642, in step 2644, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state has shifted to a non-time saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2644, in step 2645, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "empty stage" as the stay stage, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 2639 or step 2644, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, when the number of jackpots won in the probability variation gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the machine shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. If the player enters the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and time-reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, or accidentally hits the jackpot on the first main game side in the probability-variable gaming state and time-reducing gaming state, by reaching the predetermined number of times. Even if you win and move to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends, you will still be able to select the same stay stage and same variable time as when you are in a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state. By configuring the game machine so that it follows the trend, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

(Sixth embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a special game, the transition to the probability variable game state is made after the end of the special game, but this is not applicable to the gaming machine of this example. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration with different gameplay from this embodiment will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is not necessary to use a ball guarantee machine where the ball enters the specific area C22 during the jackpot as in the fifth embodiment and shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, for example. , the game state after the jackpot may be determined depending on the type of jackpot symbol. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the transition rate to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot on the first main game side and the transition rate to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot on the second main game side are the same (for example, both are 95%), but the trends in the number of execution rounds are different.

First, FIG. 104 is an example of the first (second) main game table in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, compared to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state on the first main game side and the second main game side is higher, and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuating gaming state is lower. It has become. That is, the difference in jackpot probability between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability varying gaming state is reduced. In addition, in the case of a jackpot on the second main game side, "7B", which is a jackpot symbol that shifts to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends, is a jackpot symbol that shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is easier to win than "2B". Incidentally, when a jackpot is achieved on the second main game side, the only jackpot symbol that can be selected may be "7B".

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 4 in the sixth embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 1630 (sixth), that is, in step 1606, after the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero, step 1630 (sixth) is performed. In step 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a gaming state command at the time of winning (a command related to the gaming state when winning a special game, a command sent to the sub-control board S side), and moves to step 1612. .

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 (sixth) in FIG. 16 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1790-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability-variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that can transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game, and in this example, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1790-1, in step 1790-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2 (which is the same counter as in the fifth embodiment described above). Then, the process moves to step 1790-3. Note that, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment enters the non-probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends when the number of jackpots won in the probability-variable gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. (also referred to as a limiter machine).

Next, in step 1790-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2 is a specified value (5 in this example). If Yes in step 1790-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero in step 1790-4, and proceeds to step 1790-5. Next, in step 1790-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A (this is a time saving number that is not almost certain to continue until the next jackpot win, and in this example Then, set 100). Next, in steps 1790-6 and 1790-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and moves to step 1791-4. Further, in the case of No in step 1790-3, in step 1790-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot won in the time reduction gaming state has ended. If No in step 1790-8, the process moves to step 1790-5, and the main game probability change flag remains off. On the other hand, if YES in step 1790-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1790-9. Next, in step 1790-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number B (the number of time saving times that is almost certain to continue until the next jackpot win, and in this example, 65536 (Incidentally, you may also set ∞ times). Next, in steps 1791-1 and 1791-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and moves to step 1791-4. On the other hand, if No in step 1790-1, in other words, if the stopped symbols are 2A, 2B, then in step 1791-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero, The process moves to step 1791-4. Next, in step 1791-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a variable continuous counter value command (a command related to the counter value of the variable continuous counter MP51c-2, and a command to the sub control board S side), The process moves to step 1997. In this way, in the sixth embodiment, after the jackpot related to 7A or 7B ends, the time reduction gaming state is entered, but the counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c-2 is set to the specified value (in this example, , 5), that is, when the limiter is reached, 100 times is set as the time saving number, and on the other hand, if the limiter is not reached, the time saving number may continue until the next jackpot win. It is configured to be set to 65,536 times, which is a substantially definite number of times. Note that ∞ times may be set. Furthermore, after the jackpot won in the non-time saving game state ends, that is, after the first win, the state becomes a non-probability variable game state and a time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 100.

Note that the game state transition in the sixth embodiment may be configured as follows.
After the jackpot on the first main game side in the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time saving gaming state is completed, the state may shift to the probability changing gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state. For example, after winning a jackpot in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, the non-probability varying gaming state and non-time reducing gaming state, the non-probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state, the probability varying gaming state and It may be configured such that it can shift to all four gaming states: a non-time saving gaming state, a probability varying gaming state, and a time saving gaming state. In addition, a part of a jackpot (sometimes referred to as a probability variable jackpot) that transitions to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, or a part of a jackpot in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state. It may be configured so that only some or all of the jackpots that shift to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot in the state shift to the time-reduction gaming state (how does the jackpot end when the jackpot is won in the non-time-reducing gaming state? (Game quality in terms of whether it is possible to shift to a time-reduced gaming state later). In this case, a variable probability jackpot is won in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state or a probability varying gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state, and after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a time reducing gaming state. In this case, the number of time savings may be set to 100 times (for example, 65,536 times, or ∞ times may be set) instead of until the next jackpot win (for example, 100 times may be given, or 100 times at a predetermined ratio). (It may be given as a bonus, or it may be given until the next jackpot win except for 100 times). In addition, if you win a probability variable jackpot in a probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state, and move to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, the number of time reductions will be the number of times you will win the next jackpot. It may be up to. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state or in the non-probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state, after the jackpot ends, you will be in the probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state (before reaching the limiter). It may be configured to shift to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (winning all jackpots after reaching the limiter or winning non-probability variable jackpots before reaching the limiter).

Next, FIG. 107 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2600 (sixth) and step 2700 (sixth), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game related display control process in step 2500, At 2600 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2700 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a game state display control process at the time of winning, which will be described later, and proceeds to the process of step 2999.

Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (sixth) in FIG. 23 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2590-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of rounds and the number of prizes won numerically. Next, in step 2590-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the jackpot being executed is a second main game probability variable jackpot (a jackpot symbol on the second main game side that can transition to a probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends). , in this example, 5B and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2590-2, in step 2590-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a jackpot won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2590-3, in step 2590-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a time-saving pull-back effect execution lottery in which the lottery is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5). Next, in step 2590-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed time-saving pullback effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2590-5, in step 2590-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the time-saving pullback effect (a jackpot is won in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time-reduction game state, and after the jackpot ends, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the probability fluctuation game state. In addition, a command is set to execute a performance that notifies the transition to the time-reduced gaming state and a performance that notifies that the limiter number of times has been reset, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). Note that reaching the limiter number means that the variable probability continuous counter value reaches a specified value, and resetting the limiter number means that the variable probability continuous counter value is cleared to zero. By visually confirming the time-saving pullback performance, the player recognizes that the variable probability successive counter MP51c-2 has been reset, that is, the number of jackpots until reaching the limiter has been reset, and has a sense of expectation for further successive jackpots. be able to. Further, if No in step 2590-3 or step 2590-5, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot being executed is the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state in step 2590-7. judge. If Yes in step 2590-7, in step 2590-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the number of continuous variable variables (counter value of continuous variable variable counter MP51c-2) based on the received variable continuous counter value command. do. Next, in step 2590-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the read probability variable consecutive number is the limiter unreached value {the counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c which will transition to the non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. This is a value that does not reach the specified value (in this example, 5 times) even after the end of the jackpot being executed, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to 3). In this process, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed will end and the counter value of the variable probability continuous counter MP51c-2 will reach the specified value, thereby shifting to the non-probability variable gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. We are determining whether In the case of Yes in step 2590-9, in step 2590-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a consecutive game effect execution lottery with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5) of winning. Next, in step 2591-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed consecutive game effect execution lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2591-1, in step 2592-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a consecutive game performance (a performance that notifies the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state after the end of the jackpot), A command is set to execute an effect (notifying that the jackpot is a variable probability jackpot before reaching the limiter number of times), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). In addition, if No in step 2590-7, step 2590-9 or step 2591-1, CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set in step 2592-3 to determine whether the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will change to the normal performance (after the special game ends, the probability fluctuation game state will be entered). This is a performance that does not notify whether or not the game is played, and a command is set to execute the special game performance during normal times, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). As described above, in the sixth embodiment, as a performance during a jackpot, there is a time-saving pullback performance that is a performance that notifies that the probability fluctuation gaming state will be entered after the jackpot ends, and that the probability change consecutive number of times will be reset, and the jackpot ends. It is configured to be able to execute a consecutive win effect that notifies the player that the game will later transition to a probability variable gaming state. Furthermore, there is no effect provided to inform the player that the game will move to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state after the jackpot ends, and even if the player shifts to the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the time-reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, the player will not be able to win the jackpot. It is structured so that it cannot be determined by the presentation (because the gameplay is such that you can enjoy predicting the current gaming state in the stay stage after the jackpot ends).

Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (sixth) in FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2646-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when a special game ends (or won), the timing when the game state shifts timing, the timing at which the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the same gaming state), the timing at which the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state), etc. Determine whether In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state, the stay stage is configured to be switched every time the symbols change. If Yes in step 2646-1, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is in a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state in step 2646-2. In the case of Yes in step 2646-2, in step 2646-3, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation gaming state. If Yes in step 2646-3, in step 2646-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the number of continuous variable probability (counter value of continuous variable probability counter MP51c-2) based on the received probability continuous counter value command. do. Next, in step 2646-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the number of continuous variable probability reaches the next end value (by winning the next jackpot, the counter value of the continuous variable probability counter MP51c-2 reaches the specified value, This is the value that will cause a transition to a non-probability variable gaming state after the end, and in this example, it is determined whether it is 4). If Yes in step 2646-5, the process moves to step 2646-6. On the other hand, if No in step 2646-3, the process also moves to step 2646-6. Next, in step 2646-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table A, determines and sets the stay stage, and moves to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. If No in step 2646-5, in step 2646-7, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the number of consecutive variable probability changes to the end value one after another (the counter value of the continuous variable probability counter MP51c-2 changes to the specified value due to the next jackpot win). This is the value that will cause the player to enter the non-probability fluctuating gaming state after the next jackpot is reached, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3). If Yes in step 2646-7, in step 2646-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table B, determines and sets the stay stage, and executes the next process {step 2700 (sixth) }. Further, if No in step 2646-7, in step 2646-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table C, determines and sets the stay stage, and executes the next process {step 2700 (step 2700). 6) }. Further, if No in step 2646-2, in step 2646-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "empty stage" as the staying stage, and moves to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. . In this manner, in the sixth embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state, the stay stage determination table to be referred to when determining the stay stage differs depending on how many jackpots are won to reach the limiter. The table is configured so that the number of jackpots that can be won is large before reaching the limiter (advantageous for the player), and the table is referred to in order of "stay stage determination table C → stay stage determination table B → stay stage determination table A.

Next, FIG. 110 is an example of a stay stage determination table according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, in the probability variation game state and time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, it is configured such that a lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to change the stay stage for each symbol variation. As mentioned above, when the number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter is large, that is, when the counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c-2 is small, the "stay stage determination table C" is sequentially referred to. → Stay stage determination table B → Stay stage determination table A. Additionally, "Space Stage" is most likely to be selected when referring to the stay stage determination table C, "Night Stage" is most likely to be selected when referring to the stay stage determination table B, and "Evening Stage" is the most likely to be selected when the stay stage is determined. When referring to Table A, it is most likely to be selected, so the expectation level with the lowest counter value of the probability variable continuous counter MP51c-2 for each stage of stay is "Space stage → Night stage → Evening stage" in descending order. . Note that if "no transition" is selected, the stay stage will not be changed. Note that the stay stage may be configured as follows. (1) The "Space Stage" is a stay stage where it is certain that the player is staying in a probability-changing gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state, and after the time-saving pull-back effect or consecutive winning effect is executed as a effect during symbol fluctuations. Regarding the executed jackpot, it may be configured to move to the "space stage" after the jackpot ends.
(2) Basically, it is preferable that the stay stage is set after the end of the jackpot, but in the case of a probability-changing gaming state that continues until the next jackpot and a time-reducing gaming state, the stay stage is set after the end of the previous jackpot. It may be configured such that after the end of the symbol change, the game always moves to the "space stage" even if it stays in the "evening stage" or "night stage".

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the winning game state display control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (sixth) in FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a gaming state command at the time of winning from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2702, step 2704
Based on the received command, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stores information regarding the gaming state and the jackpot symbol at the time of winning the jackpot, and proceeds to step 2706. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2706. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a game has been executed for a predetermined period of time. Here, the fact that the game is not being executed means (1) games to various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main gaming starting opening B10, general winning opening, big winning opening C10, etc.); To various ball entry ports (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port, big winning port C10, out port D80, auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) where no ball enters. (3) The game ball is not launched (the player does not touch the firing handle D44, the game ball does not fall into the gaming area D30, etc.). In this case, it may be determined that the game is not being played. If Yes in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby demo screen (a screen that is displayed on the production display device SG when the game is not progressing for a predetermined period of time, such as character introduction, story introduction, etc.). A command to display a moving image is set, and the process moves to step 2710. It should be noted that the display of the standby demo screen will end when the execution of the game is resumed. In addition, when the execution of the game is restarted, (1) game balls are inserted into various winning holes (first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10, general winning hole, big winning hole C10, etc.) Detects the entry of the ball into various ball entry ports (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning port, big winning port C10, out port D80, auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) The game is executed when the entry of the game ball is detected, and (3) the launch of the game ball is detected (the player touches the launch handle D44, the game ball is flowing down into the game area D30, etc.). may be determined to have been restarted. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2706, the process moves to step 2710.

Next, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby demo screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined operation (for example, a long-press operation) of the sub-input button SB has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display information regarding the game state and jackpot symbol at the time of winning the jackpot on the performance display device SG, and proceeds to step 2999. It should be noted that if the result in step 2710 or step 2712 is No, the process moves to step 2999 as well. In this way, in the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the sub-input button SB while the standby demo screen is displayed, information regarding the gaming state and jackpot symbols at the time of winning the jackpot can be displayed on the production display device SG. It becomes.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, when the number of jackpots won in the probability variation gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. Depending on the stay stage, it can indicate whether or not the counter value of the probability-variable continuous counter MP51c-2 is large, that is, the number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter. By operating the button SB, it is possible to display information regarding the gaming state and jackpot symbol at the time of winning the jackpot on the performance display device SG, and whether or not the player has won the jackpot in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and time reduction gaming state. By visually confirming information such as this, it is possible to estimate the remaining number of jackpots until reaching the limiter, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, by performing a specific operation on the sub-input button during symbol fluctuation (for example, pressing and holding the sub-input button for a predetermined period of time outside the valid button operation period to perform a button operation that triggers a production during symbol fluctuation). , the current gaming state (for example, whether it is a probability-changing gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state or a non-probability-changing gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state) or the remaining number of limiters may be notified. In addition, when you hit a jackpot, you can hit the jackpot by performing a specific operation (for example, pressing and holding it for more than a specified time) on the sub input button during the jackpot (during jackpot start demo time, round execution, jackpot end demo time). The gaming state (probability variable gaming state and time-reduction gaming state or non-probability-variable gaming state and time-reducing gaming state) at the time of winning may be notified.

In the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the number of time reductions awarded after the jackpot is awarded when winning the jackpot in the time saving gaming state is greater than the number of time reductions awarded after the jackpot ends when winning the jackpot in the non-time saving gaming state. It may be configured such that the number of times of time saving is relatively larger. In such a configuration, depending on whether or not the jackpot was won in the time-reduced game state, even if the same jackpot symbol (for example, "7A") is won, the number of winnings in the time-reduced game state after the jackpot ends The selection tendency of the variable time (different limited frequency tables to be referred to, the transition mode of the limited frequency state, etc.) may be configured to be different from the performance tendency. In addition, the transition mode of the limited frequency state is different, for example, after the jackpot won in the non-time saving gaming state, "Refer to 20 fluctuations in limited frequency table A → Refer to 79 fluctuations in limited frequency table B → Limited frequency" It may be configured such that the table C is referred to by 1 fluctuation, and after the jackpot won in the time reduction gaming state is completed, the limited frequency table D is referred to by 100 fluctuations. In addition, in such a configuration, group A is provided as a group of jackpot symbols, and if a jackpot symbol of group A is won in a non-time saving gaming state, the system shifts to a non-time saving gaming state after the jackpot ends. However, if a group A jackpot symbol is won in the time reduction gaming state, the system is configured such that the system shifts to the time reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, and there are multiple types of time reduction times to be awarded. Good too. In addition, after the jackpot won in the non-time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times is set to 20 and "Refer to limited frequency table A by 5 fluctuations → Refer to limited frequency table B by 4 fluctuations → Refer to limited frequency table C by 1 fluctuation. ”, and after the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings is set to 100 and “Refer to the limited frequency table D by 100 fluctuations (or refer to the limited frequency table D by 99 fluctuations → refer to the limited frequency table E by 1 fluctuation)”. ).

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example has the configuration of the above-mentioned ST machine, and is configured so that after the end of a jackpot, there are cases in which it shifts to a probability variation gaming state and cases in which it shifts to a non-probability variation gaming state. The probability of winning the jackpot before the state ends may be 65% or less. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won on the second main game side in the probability-variable gaming state, the system may be configured to always shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, it may be configured as the above-mentioned ball locking machine, and in such a case, the configuration is such that the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot in the short-open jackpot is smaller than the number of time reductions after the jackpot in the long-open jackpot. You may. In addition, the staying stage in the probability variable gaming state is the same after the end of the jackpot until the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot in the short-open jackpot has passed, and after the end of the jackpot in the long-open jackpot and after the end of the jackpot in the short-open jackpot. A stay stage (for example, a battle stage where you fight enemy characters), and then, if it is after the jackpot in a long open jackpot, a different stay stage (for example, a short fluctuating time whether it is a jackpot or a loss) ). In addition, after the long open jackpot ends, the number of time reductions is 100 times, and the first 30 times are in the jackpot immediate notification mode (a mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short regardless of the result), and after that, 70 times. It may be configured such that the number of time reductions is 50 times, and all 50 times are the battle performance mode, while the time becomes the battle performance mode after the short opening jackpot.

Further, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows. Note that the configurations listed below may be combined as appropriate, or only one may be applied.
(A1) The maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more (A2) The small winning rate on the second main game side is high probability (1020/1024 etc.)
(A3) Even if you win a jackpot triggered by a small hit on the second main game side, the time reduction game state may not be entered after the jackpot ends. (A4) On hold on the second main game side after the jackpot ends. The probability of winning the jackpot by the end of the symbol variation in which all the symbols have been consumed is 65% or less (after the jackpot is completed due to the stoppage of the jackpot symbol on the first main game side that won in the non-time reduction gaming state, or (It may be configured so that the number of time reductions can be 100 times after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win)
(A5) Even if a game ball enters the big prize opening during a small hit, the ball may or may not enter the V winning opening depending on the operation of the distribution member in the big winning opening. You can. Also, by changing the above configuration,
(B1) The maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is 2 or more (B2) The number of time reductions granted after the end of the jackpot is multiple times, and the number of time reductions is the same as the maximum number of reservations on the second main game side. be

Furthermore, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(C1) In addition to the time saving number that is counted both when the first main game symbol fluctuates and when the second main game symbol fluctuates, there is a time saving number that counts only the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. (C2) In addition to the time saving number that counts both when the first main game symbol changes and when the second main game symbol changes, there is a time saving number that counts only the change in the second main game symbol. (C3) The reservation on the first main game side is prioritized over the reservation on the second main game side. (C4) The reservation on the second main game side is prioritized over the reservation on the first main game side. (C5) If the losing symbol stops at the time reducing final fluctuation that ends the time reducing gaming state, the fluctuation fixed time related to the losing symbol is in a non-time reducing gaming state (C6) First main game Design the jackpot loop rate in the time-shortened gaming state based on the rate of transition to the time-shortened gaming state after the end of the side jackpot and the percentage that can win the jackpot before the end of the time-shortened gaming state (design to be 65% or less) , It may also be configured such that the number of time reductions can be different depending on the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol.

The following signals may be able to be output as external terminal output signals as described above with reference to FIG. It is preferable to apply this method to a case where the jackpot is executed after the small win is completed by entering the ball into the V winning hole during the above-mentioned small win.
Signal type: Outline of jackpot signal: Signal 1 signal that outputs that a special game or small win game is being executed, or that the gaming state is in a time-reduction gaming state (i.e., a state advantageous to the player). Configuration: [Output timing] Condition device operation flag off → Timing 0.504 seconds after turning on [Output period] Condition device operation flag on → Timing when main game time saving flag is off when off, or main game time saving flag on → Duplication of the output period that outputs an on signal until the timing when the conditional device activation flag is off when it is off: [Possibility of duplication] None Note: When the conditional device activation flag turns from on to off and shifts to a non-time saving gaming state will remain on until all the fluctuations related to the hold on the second main game side that exist at the transition timing are completed, that is, it can be output across the time reduction gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state. In addition, in the above, if a small hit is won due to a symbol change related to the last one pending on the second main game side, and a jackpot triggered by the small hit is executed, there will be a time limit after the jackpot ends. When the state shifts to the shortened gaming state, it remains on, but when the state shifts to the non-time reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends, it changes from on to off. Further, after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win won by symbol fluctuation on the second main game side, it may be configured so that it can shift to either the non-time reduction gaming state or the time reduction gaming state. Often, in such a configuration, a jackpot triggered by a small hit is executed in the time-reduced gaming state and a hold on the second main game side remains, and after the jackpot ends, the non-time-reduced gaming state is executed. Therefore, if a jackpot is won triggered by another small hit due to a change in the second main game symbol related to the remaining hold on the second main game side, after the jackpot ends (the jackpot end timing is set to timing A) ), if the gaming state is the time reduction gaming state, the above signal will continue to be output even after timing A, but after the jackpot ends (the jackpot end timing is timing A), the signal will continue to be output after timing A. When the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, if the number of pending games on the second main game side is 0 after the end of the jackpot, the above signal may be configured to end output at timing A. can. In addition, if you win a small hit in the last remaining hold on the second main game side during a non-time reduction gaming state and the ball does not enter the V winning hole during the small win, the small hit will be When this ends (= triggered by the end of the small winning end demonstration time), the output of the time saving signal ends. In addition to this signal, jackpot signals may also be output. If the structure is configured to have jackpot signals A, B, and C, (1) jackpot signal A will be used to output jackpot signals during a small hit and during a jackpot. (2) The jackpot signal B is output during the jackpot, but not during the small win. (3) The jackpot signal C is output during the small win won in the non-time saving gaming state, and when the jackpot is won in the non-time saving gaming state. It may be configured such that the output is output when all jackpots are won, regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, it is configured to output a jackpot signal as an external terminal output signal different from the above signal, and when the jackpot symbol stops and the jackpot starts, the jackpot signal is output from the start of the jackpot start demonstration time, Even during a small hit, if the ball enters the V winning hole, the jackpot signal may be output from the timing of ball entry into the V winning hole.

Furthermore, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows. It is preferable to apply this method to a case where the jackpot is executed after the small win is completed by entering the ball into the V winning hole during the above-mentioned small win.
(D1) In the time-reduced game state, a pre-read effect is executed when the ball enters the second main game starting port. Specifically, in the time-reduced game state, a small hit occurs in the hold that has already occurred. A look-ahead performance is executed to suggest or inform whether or not there is a hold, using the occurrence of the hold on the second main game side (ball entering the second main game start opening) that has newly occurred thereafter as a trigger.
(D2) If you win a small hit on the first main game side (a small win in which it is difficult to enter the V winning hole compared to a small win on the second main game side) in the time reduction gaming state, the corresponding small win After the jackpot triggered by a hit ends, the game enters a time-shortened gaming state (the presentation during the jackpot may be a presentation mode in which a series of games ends, such as a battle-losing presentation).
(D3) If you win a jackpot triggered by a stop of the jackpot symbol or a jackpot triggered by a small hit in a non-time saving gaming state, and after the jackpot ends, you move to the time saving gaming state, and the number of time saving times is 100. If there is, during the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state, a look-ahead effect that suggests the possibility that there is a hold that will result in a small hit will not be executed within the hold.

Furthermore, the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured so that a jackpot is executed after the small win ends by entering the ball into the V winning hole during the above-mentioned small win, and the jackpot symbol on the second main game side is stopped. In order to be able to execute a production that is the same as the production that is executed when a game ball enters the V winning slot during the triggered jackpot, which notifies that a ball has entered the V winning slot. (The fluctuating performance related to the small winning symbol and the fluctuating performance related to the jackpot symbol may be a common performance).

Furthermore, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows. It is preferable to apply this method to a case where the above-mentioned jackpot is entered into a specific area and the game state is changed to a probability variable game state after the jackpot ends.
(E1) The ratio of long open jackpots in the jackpots on the second main game side is higher than the ratio of long open jackpots in jackpots on the first main game side (short open jackpots also exist on the second main game side) are doing)
(E2) The probability fluctuation gaming state does not end with the number of symbol fluctuations. (E3) This is the limiter machine described above. (E4) Limiter (Jackpot in the probability fluctuation gaming state which shifts to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot ends) The number of times saved after the jackpot is awarded is relatively greater after the jackpot has reached the limiter than after the jackpot has not reached the limiter (in which the player has won a predetermined number of times consecutively). Furthermore, it may be configured such that the number of time reductions after the jackpot ends when a jackpot is hit in the time reduction gaming state is greater than the number of time reductions after the jackpot ends when the jackpot is won in the non-time reduction gaming state (E5). The first main game player who won the jackpot in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state won the first main game player who won the jackpot in the time reduction gaming state or the second main player who won in the time reduction gaming state. The number of time reductions awarded after the end of the jackpot on the main game side is relatively greater (E6) There are multiple types of time reductions that can be awarded after the end of the jackpot (for example, non-probability fluctuating game state and non-time reduction game The number of time reductions after the end of the short open jackpot on the first main game side that won in the state is different from the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot when the ball did not enter a specific area in the long open jackpot, etc.)

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the limited frequency transition (determining the timing at which the limited frequency state shifts) is determined by random numbers, and is not determined depending on the stopped symbols {random numbers for determining limited frequency (in a broad sense). For example, a fluctuation pattern table reference state determination random number) is used to determine a table to be referred to when determining a fluctuation mode after a jackpot and a limited frequency transition pattern according to a lottery result using the random number. As an example, by executing a random number lottery regarding the limited frequency transition after the jackpot ends (or executing a random number lottery regarding the limited frequency transition described above while the jackpot symbol is changing), the fluctuation pattern selection state after the jackpot is determined. Or, the subsequent limited frequency transition pattern may be determined. As a random number range, 0 to 299 out of 1024 is "limited frequency A 50 times → limited frequency B 49 times → limited frequency C 1 time", and 300 to 599 is " Limited frequency A 20 times → Limited frequency B 79 times → Limited frequency C 1 time”, 600 to 899 is configured as “Limited frequency B 99 times → Limited frequency C 1 time”, 900 to 1023 is configured as “Limited frequency D 100 times”, etc. Good too.

(summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (higher-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further structures shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. You can.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (1) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped. first identification information display control means for controlling display;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information is displayed variably in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second identification information is stopped. a second identification information display control means for controlling the display;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, if a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) in an advantageous state for the player until a period elapses;
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop that the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. It has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and if a ball enters a specific area while the special game is being executed, the special game is executed. Game state transition control that can be set to a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game, but set to a low probability lottery state after the special game is completed if no ball enters a specific area during the execution of the special game. means and
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
A performance display content control means capable of displaying a performance on a performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The second identification information is more important than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during the execution of a special game that is executed by being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the first identification information belongs to a predetermined group. It is configured such that the ease of entering a ball into a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of a special game is increased by displaying the information in a stopped display mode that belongs to a predetermined group. Ori,
As the performance displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), it is configured to display a specific area entry performance that notifies that a ball has entered a specific area (for example, specific area C22). has been
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured not to display a specific area ball entering effect at the time when a ball first enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of a special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (2) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit capable of displaying a performance (for example, a performance display device SG,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped. first identification information display control means for controlling display;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information is displayed variably in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second identification information is stopped. a second identification information display control means for controlling the display;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, if a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) in an advantageous state for the player until a period elapses;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop that the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. The game has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and a ball has entered a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of the special game. In this case, a high-probability lottery state can be established after the execution of the special game is completed, while if no ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, the lottery state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. It is possible to control the state to a low probability lottery state,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) more easily than the normal game state, and after the execution of the special game is completed, the high probability lottery state and When the control is performed so as to be in a specific gaming state, and the state is a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state, one unit is defined as the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display, and from the end of execution of the special game. After the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times, it is configured to enter a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state,
If the state changes from a high probability lottery state and specific gaming state to a low probability lottery state and specific gaming state, starting from the time when the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times, after the one unit has been played a certain number of times, the probability is low. It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal gaming state,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
In the low-probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a special game is executed, and a special game is specified during execution of the special game. If a ball enters the area, it is configured so that it can enter a high probability lottery state and a normal game state after the execution of the special game.
In the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game is executed, and the special game is specified during execution of the special game. If a ball enters an area (for example, specific area C22), it is configured such that a high probability lottery state and a specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed.
In the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game is executed, and the special game is specified during execution of the special game. If there is no ball entering the area (for example, specific area C22), it is configured such that a low probability lottery state and a specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game.
In the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game is executed, and the special game is specified during execution of the special game. Effect display format after the end of the special game when a ball enters an area (for example, specific area C22) and becomes a high probability lottery state and a specific game state after the execution of the special game and the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game is executed, and during the execution of the special game, a specific area (e.g. , the performance display format after the special game ends is the same in the case where there is no ball entering the specific area C22) and the special game is in a low probability lottery state and a specific game state after the end of the special game. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with an identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g) that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling the
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is lower than the predetermined probability. It also has a high probability lottery state where the probability is high.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) more easily than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game ends. When it is a high probability lottery state and a specific game state, the period from the start of changing display of identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the count starts from the end of execution of the special game. After the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times, the system is configured to enter a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state,
If the state changes from a high probability lottery state and specific gaming state to a low probability lottery state and specific gaming state, starting from the time when the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times, after the one unit has been played a certain number of times, the probability is low. It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal gaming state,
Outputting first information, second information different from the first information, and third information different from the first information and the second information as external output information to be output from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside. configured to allow
The first information is configured to be output when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal gaming state,
Even when the first information is output in a high-probability lottery state and a specific game state and becomes a low-probability lottery state and a specific game state, the first information can continue to be output; The first information is configured not to be output in the probability lottery state and the normal game state,
The second information is configured to be output when the identification information is stopped and displayed,
The time at which the second signal is output when the second information is output triggered by the stop display of the identification information in a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state, and the time when the second signal is output in a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state. The time at which the second signal is output when the second information is output triggered by the stop display of the identification information is the same time,
The selection tendency of the variable display time of identification information in a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state is different from the selection tendency of the variable display time of identification information in a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state. This is a pachinko game machine with special features.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (4) is
The starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is arranged at a position where it is easier for the game ball flowing down the first area side to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the second area side. ,
The game ball flowing down the first area side is placed in a position where it is easier for the ball to enter than the game ball flowing down the second area side.A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (e.g. , 2nd grand prize opening C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling the
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed multiple times that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player;
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the case of a specific gaming state, the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and it becomes the specific gaming state. A gaming state control means capable of controlling not to enter the normal gaming state until the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the time of the game; and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S),
A first variation pattern table is used as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in a specific gaming state, and a second variation pattern table has a different tendency in selecting the variation display time of identification information from the first variation pattern table. and a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table is displayed in a specific period in a specific gaming state. a first fluctuation state that refers to a table; a second fluctuation state that is transitioned from the first fluctuation state that refers to a second fluctuation pattern table after the end of the specific period in a specific gaming state; and a transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state. It has at least a third fluctuation state that is transitioned from the second fluctuation state that refers to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
In the case of a specific game state, a notification image can be displayed on a performance display section (for example, a performance display device SG) as a performance to encourage the firing of game balls into the first area, and the notification image The images include a first notification image occupying a predetermined display area and a second notification image occupying a smaller display area than the first notification image,
The first notification image is displayed when the game is in a specific gaming state and satisfies the predetermined display conditions, while the second notification image is displayed when the game is in a specific game state and does not satisfy the predetermined display conditions. It is configured so that it is displayed as
If the predetermined conditions are satisfied in a situation where the first variation state is in the first variation state and the next variation display of the identification information is the second variation state, both the first notification image and the second notification image are in the first variation state. While it is possible to output from the state to the second fluctuating state, in a situation where the second fluctuating state and the next fluctuating display of the identification information will be the third fluctuating state, the first notification image and the second notification image This pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that none of the above is output from the second variation state to the third variation state.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling the
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed multiple times that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player;
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the case of a specific gaming state, the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and it becomes the specific gaming state. A gaming state control means capable of controlling not to enter the normal gaming state until the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the time of the game; and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S),
A first variation pattern table is used as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in a specific gaming state, and a second variation pattern table has a different tendency in selecting the variation display time of identification information from the first variation pattern table. and a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table is displayed in a specific period in a specific gaming state. a first fluctuation state that refers to a table; a second fluctuation state that is transitioned from the first fluctuation state that refers to a second fluctuation pattern table after the end of the specific period in a specific gaming state; and a transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state. It has at least a third fluctuation state that is transitioned from the second fluctuation state that refers to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
is in a first fluctuation state, and the specific performance is not executed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times starting from the time when the first fluctuation state is entered; It is configured such that the specific performance can be executed after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times starting from the time when the state is reached,
It is configured such that a specific performance can be executed when the second fluctuation state is present,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a specific performance is not executed when the game is in a third variation state.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (6) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
a propriety determination means for executing propriety determination based on the random number when the propriety determination permission condition is satisfied;
Identification information display content determining means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped. identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to stop being displayed;
The result of the win/fail judgment by the win/fail judgment means is a win, and the identification information is stopped and the identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). special game control means that executes a special game advantageous to the player after the game has been completed;
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the case of a specific gaming state, the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and it becomes the specific gaming state. A gaming state control means capable of controlling not to enter the normal gaming state until the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the time of the game; and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S),
A first variation pattern table is used as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in a specific gaming state, and a second variation pattern table has a different tendency in selecting the variation display time of identification information from the first variation pattern table. and a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table is displayed in a specific period in a specific gaming state. a first fluctuation state that refers to a table; a second fluctuation state that is transitioned from the first fluctuation state that refers to a second fluctuation pattern table after the end of the specific period in a specific gaming state; and a transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state. It has at least a third fluctuation state that is transitioned from the second fluctuation state that refers to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
is in a first fluctuation state, and the specific performance is not executed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times starting from the time when the first fluctuation state is entered; It is configured such that the specific performance can be executed after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times starting from the time when the state is reached,
It is configured such that a specific performance can be executed when the second fluctuation state is present,
It is configured so that the specific performance will not be executed when it is in the third fluctuation state,
In the case of the first fluctuation state, the number of reservations at the time when the permission condition for judgment of validity is satisfied is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time when the condition for permission for judgment of validity is satisfied is the first reservation number. The average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the case where the second pending number is larger than the number, and when the result of the judgment by the judgment means is non-winning when the permission condition for judgment is satisfied. While an average value difference occurs over a predetermined time,
In the case of the second fluctuation state, the number of reservations at the time when the validity judgment permission condition is satisfied is the first suspension number, and the case when the suspension number at the time when the validity judgment permission condition is satisfied is the second suspension number. The structure is configured such that the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is the same in the case where the number of winnings is on hold and when the result of the judgment by the judgment means when the eligibility judgment permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. Ori,
In the case of the third fluctuation state, the number of reservations at the time when the permission condition for judgment of validity is satisfied is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time when the condition for permission for judgment of validity is satisfied is the second number of reservations. The structure is configured such that the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is the same in the case where the number of winnings is on hold and when the result of the judgment by the judgment means when the eligibility judgment permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with an identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g) that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are satisfied, a validity determination is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display mode of the identification information based on the validation result are determined. a game content determining means for determining the
In accordance with the determination by the game content determining means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is lower than the predetermined probability. It also has a high probability lottery state where the probability is high.
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) more easily than the normal gaming state,
After the execution of the special game is finished, control is performed to enable either a high-probability lottery state or a low-probability lottery state,
If a high probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the period from the start of the fluctuation display of the identification information to the stop display is considered as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After the game has been played once, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal gaming state,
If a low-probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the period from the start of the display of fluctuation of the identification information to the stop display is considered as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After the game has been played twice, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal gaming state,
When the first number of times is X and the second number of times is Y,
Y≦X
It is configured so that
The performance display format in a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state is configured so that the performance display format in a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state can be the same,
Let the probability of a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is A%,
In the event that a high-probability lottery occurs after the completion of a special game, the period from the completion of the special game until the said one unit is played the first number of times, counting from the completion of the special game. Let B% be the probability that identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group.
If a low probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the one unit will be the second number of rows starting from the end of the execution of the special game. If the probability that identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group during the period until it is displayed is C%, then
(A/100)×(B/100)<(A/100)×(B/100)+{(100-A)/100}×(C/100)<(A/100)
and,
(A/100)×(B/100)<(A/100)×(B/100)+{(100-A)/100}×(C/100)<(B/100)
This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with an identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g) that can display identification information,
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are satisfied, a validity determination is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display mode of the identification information based on the validation result are determined. a game content determining means for determining the
In accordance with the determination by the game content determining means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is lower than the predetermined probability. It also has a high probability lottery state where the probability is high.
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) more easily than the normal gaming state,
After the execution of the special game is finished, control is performed to enable either a high-probability lottery state or a low-probability lottery state,
If a high probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the period from the start of the fluctuation display of the identification information to the stop display is considered as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After the game has been played once, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal gaming state,
If a low-probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the period from the start of the display of fluctuation of the identification information to the stop display is considered as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After the game has been played twice, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal gaming state,
When the first number of times is X and the second number of times is Y,
Y≦X
It is configured so that
As a performance display format, it has at least a performance display format A and a performance display format B that is a performance display format different from the performance display format A,
When the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state occur after the execution of the special game, the effect display format can be set to either effect display format A or effect display format B. In the case of a low probability lottery state and a specific game state, the effect display format A is not set as the effect display format, but the effect display format B can be set,
Let the probability of a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is A%,
In the event that a high-probability lottery occurs after the completion of a special game, the period from the completion of the special game until the said one unit is played the first number of times, counting from the completion of the special game. Let B% be the probability that identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group.
If a low probability lottery state and a specific game state occur after the execution of a special game, the one unit will be the second number of rows starting from the end of the execution of the special game. If the probability that identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group during the period until it is displayed is C%, then
(A/100)×(B/100)<(A/100)×(B/100)+{(100-A)/100}×(C/100)<(A/100)
and,
(A/100)×(B/100)<(A/100)×(B/100)+{(100-A)/100}×(C/100)<(B/100)
This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (9) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or the ball can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is in the closed state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) (For example, the second main game starting port B10) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured such that the game ball cannot enter the ball or it is difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the open state. ,
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) into which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole (for example, the second large winning hole C20) can enter;
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until a condition for starting a variable display of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information regarding a certain first reservation are satisfied, the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol a first identification information display control means for controlling the display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until a variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. a second random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol a second identification information display control means for controlling the display unit B21g) to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information;
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning opening game that executes a variable winning opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. Winning opening opening game control means;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific gaming state that is likely to become an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, and when it is in the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the normal game state is counted from the end of execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined number of times. It is configured so that
The predetermined terminal number includes at least a first terminal number and a second terminal number which is a different number from the first terminal number,
The second reservation can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
A second special game that is executed when a variable winning opening opening game is executed due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). After the end of the game, it is configured so that it can enter a specific gaming state,
After the first special game that is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to enter either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the It is configured to enter a normal gaming state after one unit has been played the first final number of times,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). If the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times starting from the end of the second special game. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (10) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or the ball can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is in the closed state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) (For example, the second main game starting port B10) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured such that the game ball cannot enter the ball or it is difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the open state. ,
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) into which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole (for example, the second large winning hole C20) can enter;
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until a condition for starting a variable display of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information regarding a certain first reservation are satisfied, the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol a first identification information display control means for controlling the display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until a variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. a second random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol a second identification information display control means for controlling the display unit B21g) to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information;
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning opening game that executes a variable winning opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. Winning opening opening game control means;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
The game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than the normal game state. , after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is finished, it is controlled to be in a specific game state, and when it is in the specific game state, the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is controlled. unit, and is configured not to enter the normal gaming state until the unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the end of execution of the first special game or the second special game,
The predetermined terminal number includes at least a first terminal number and a second terminal number which is a different number from the first terminal number,
The second reservation can occur until a predetermined number of 2 or more is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
A second special game that is executed when a variable winning opening opening game is executed due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). After the end of the game, it is configured so that it can enter a specific gaming state,
After the first special game that is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to enter either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the It is configured to enter a normal gaming state after one unit has been played the first final number of times,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). If the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times starting from the end of the second special game. has been
When the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed as a predetermined mode in the normal gaming state and a special game is executed, the probability that the second identification information will be in the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is finished is as follows: This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the pachinko game machine is displayed in a fixed manner is higher than the probability that the pachinko game machine is displayed in a fixed manner.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (11) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state. A variable member configured to prevent a game ball from entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or to make it difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory) B11d) and
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) into which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole (for example, the second large winning hole C20) can enter;
a first main game identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first main game identification information;
a second main game identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second main game identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the first main game identification information variable display start condition is satisfied, and the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means for controlling;
When the first main game identification information fluctuation display start condition regarding a certain first reservation is satisfied, the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game identification information display part (for example, the first main game identification information a first main game identification information display control means that controls the first main game identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the first main game symbol display section A21g) and then to stop displaying the first main game identification information;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game identification information is satisfied, so that the second suspension occurs. a second random number temporary storage means for controlling;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second main game identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second main game identification information display section (for example, the second main game identification information a second main game identification information display control means that controls the second main game identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the second main game symbol display section B21g) and then to stop displaying the second main game identification information;
a first special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A variable winning opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. a variable prize opening opening game control means for executing;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific game state that is likely to be in the open state, and is controlled so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is in the specific game state, the first main game identification The period from the start of the variable display of the information or the second main game identification information to the stop display is one unit, and from the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined final number of times. It is configured so that it does not enter the normal gaming state,
The second suspension can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Performance display content that allows sub-game identification information to be displayed on a performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG) based on information regarding the first main game identification information or second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means control means;
During the period in which the first main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner on the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) or the second main game identification information is the second main game identification information. After the sub-game identification information is variably displayed on the performance display section (for example, the performance display device SG) within the period in which it is variably displayed on the information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). and sub-game identification information display control means for controlling the pseudo-variable units to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and to be controlled to be definitively stopped and displayed after the pseudo-variable units are executed one or more times,
The sub-game identification information is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-variable unit from the time when the variable display starts until the time when the sub-game identification information stops displaying.
The probability that a pseudo variable unit will be executed when the first main game identification information is displayed in a variable manner in the normal gaming state is as follows: This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of execution is lower than that of execution.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (12) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port or it is in the open state. A variable member that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) into which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole (for example, the second large winning hole C20) can enter;
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-game section (e.g., sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display section (e.g., sub-control board S),
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until a condition for starting a variable display of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information regarding a certain first reservation are satisfied, the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol a first identification information display control means for controlling the display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until a variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. a second random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol a second identification information display control means for controlling the display unit B21g) to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information;
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning opening game that executes a variable winning opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. Winning opening opening game control means;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is moved from the closed state within the displacement driving period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. It is configured to be able to perform an easy-to-enter ball game in which the action of displacing the ball to the open state and then displacing it to the closed state is performed one or more times,
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific gaming state that is likely to become an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, and when it is in the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the normal game state is counted from the end of execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined number of times. It is configured so that
The predetermined terminal number includes at least a first terminal number and a second terminal number which is a different number from the first terminal number,
The second reservation can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
A second special game that is executed when a variable winning opening opening game is executed due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). After the end of the game, it is configured so that it can enter a specific gaming state,
After the first special game that is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to enter either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the It is configured to enter a normal gaming state after one unit has been played the first final number of times,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). If the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times starting from the end of the second special game. has been
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in the specific gaming state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode or the specific mode. In this case, the variable display time of the second identification information is such that when the easy-to-enter ball game is executed once in the specific game state, the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is in the open state. It is structured so that it is longer than the period,
When a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state, The variable display time of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode or the specific mode is the variable member when the easy-to-enter ball game is executed once in the specific game state. (For example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be shorter than the period in which it is in the open state,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed, and during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, access to a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is executed. In the case where a specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game that is executed when a ball enters, the first identification information is used as an initial variation display of the first identification information or second identification information in the specific gaming state. is displayed in a variable manner, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. The second identification information is displayed in a variable manner as the first identification information or the second identification information, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second identification information variable display time is configured to be longer.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (13) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to a second starting port (e.g., second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, When the game ball is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or the ball can enter the ball easily compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is in the closed state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to prevent the game ball from entering or to make it difficult to enter the game ball compared to the open state;
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) where the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can enter,
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until a condition for starting a variable display of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information regarding a certain first reservation are satisfied, the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol a first identification information display control means for controlling the display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until a variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. a second random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol a second identification information display control means for controlling the display unit B21g) to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information;
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning opening game that executes a variable winning opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. Winning opening opening game control means;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is moved from the closed state within the displacement driving period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. It is configured to be able to perform an easy-to-enter ball game in which the action of displacing the ball to the open state and then displacing it to the closed state is performed one or more times,
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific gaming state that is likely to become an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, and when it is in the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the normal game state is counted from the end of execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined number of times. It is configured so that
The predetermined terminal number includes at least a first terminal number and a second terminal number which is a different number from the first terminal number,
The second reservation can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
A second special game that is executed when a variable winning opening opening game is executed due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). After the end of the game, it is configured so that it can enter a specific gaming state,
After the first special game that is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to enter either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the It is configured to enter a normal gaming state after one unit has been played the first final number of times,
Specified after the end of the second special game that is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state. When the gaming state is entered, the normal gaming state is entered after the one unit has been played the second final number of times starting from the end of the execution of the second special game,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in the specific gaming state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. The variable display time of the second identification information in different stop display modes is determined by the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) when the easy-to-enter ball game is executed once in a specific game state. ) is configured so that the period is longer than the period in which it is in the open state,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the second identification information is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the specific gaming state, When the stop display mode of the second identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode, the variable display time of the second identification information is such that the easy-to-enter ball game is executed once in the specific game state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the period when the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is in the open state can be shorter than the period when the machine is opened.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (14) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member (e.g., second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) attached to the second starting port that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is displaced to the open state, the second starting port (e.g. , the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to prevent the game ball from entering or to make it difficult to enter the game ball compared to the open state;
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) where the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can enter,
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
a first random number acquisition means that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until a condition for starting a variable display of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first suspension occurs. a first random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information regarding a certain first reservation are satisfied, the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol a first identification information display control means for controlling the display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until a variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. a second random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold are satisfied, the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol a second identification information display control means for controlling the display unit B21g) to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information;
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning opening game that executes a variable winning opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. Winning opening opening game control means;
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific gaming state that is likely to become an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, and when it is in the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and the normal game state is counted from the end of execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit is played a predetermined number of times. It is configured so that
The predetermined terminal number includes at least a first terminal number and a second terminal number which is a different number from the first terminal number,
The second reservation can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
A second special game that is executed when a variable winning opening opening game is executed due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific manner and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). After the end of the game, the game is configured to be in a specific gaming state.
After the first special game that is executed when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to enter either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state is entered after the end of the first special game, the It is configured to enter a normal gaming state after one unit has been played the first final number of times,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in a specific gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). If the specified gaming state is entered after the end of the second special game, and the normal gaming state is entered after the one unit has been played the first final number of times, counting from the end of the second special game, the It is configured so that a specific performance can be executed during execution of the second special game or before execution of the second special game,
Executed when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in a specific gaming state, a variable winning opening opening game is executed, and a ball enters a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). If the specified gaming state is entered after the end of the second special game, and the normal gaming state is entered after the one unit has been played the second final number of times, counting from the end of the execution of the second special game, This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute a specific performance during execution of a second special game or before execution of the second special game.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (15) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. ), when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10), or the ball can enter the starting port easily compared to the closed state. Yes, when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10), or the ball is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the open state. A variable member (for example, second main game starting port electric accessory B11d),
The game ball flowing down the first area is located in a position where it is easier for the ball to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the second area. 2nd grand prize opening C20) and
A specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) where the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can enter,
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A speaker capable of outputting audio (for example, speaker D24),
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) and the audio output to the speaker (for example, the speaker D24),
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling the
a first special game control means that executes a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable winning hole opening game control means executes a variable winning hole opening game that can change the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) from a closed state to an open state. ,
A second special game in which a unit game that can be advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when a variable winning opening opening game is executed and a ball enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). a second special game control means for executing;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a game state regarding the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is set in a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) than the normal gaming state. has a specific game state in which it is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
As a variable winning hole opening game, there is a variable winning hole opening game A in which the probability of a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning hole C27) is a predetermined probability, and a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning hole C27). It has at least a variable winning opening opening game B whose probability is lower than the predetermined probability,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, a variable winning hole firing effect is executed that instructs to fire the game ball toward the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20). It is configured to obtain
The variable prize opening presentation is a presentation mode in which a specific display is displayed on the presentation display section (for example, the presentation display device SG), and then a specific sound is output from the speaker (for example, the speaker D24).
When a game ball is fired toward the second area, the fired game ball can flow down the second area and enter the variable prize opening (for example, the second grand prize opening C20), but the ball cannot be heard from the speaker. When a game ball is fired toward the second area at the timing when the output of the specific sound starts, the fired game ball flows down the second area and enters the variable prize opening (for example, the second grand prize opening). C20), the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) is in a closed state, or the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) is in a closed state. The probability that the variable prize opening (for example, the second grand prize opening C20) is open is higher than the probability that
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, and when the variable winning hole opening game A is executed, the variable winning hole opening is started after the identification information starts to be displayed in a variable manner. It is configured such that the variable winning hole firing performance can be executed during the period until the game A ends,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the normal gaming state, and when the variable winning hole opening game B is executed, the variable winning hole opening is started after the identification information starts to be displayed in a variable manner. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that variable winning hole firing performance is not executed during a period until the execution of game B is completed.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (16) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped. first identification information display control means for controlling display;
a second random number obtaining means for obtaining a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, second main game starting port B10);
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means. and,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, if a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) in an advantageous state for the player until a period elapses;
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop that the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group. The game has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and a ball has entered a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of the special game. In this case, a high-probability lottery state can be established after the execution of the special game is completed, while if no ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, the lottery state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. a gaming state transition control means for controlling to a low probability lottery state;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed in the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is compared to the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state in which it is easy to enter the ball, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game, and when it is in the specific gaming state, the first identification information or the second identification information changes. The period from the start of the display to the stop display is regarded as one unit, and after the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the end of the execution of the special game, the normal game state is established.
It is possible to measure the consecutive number of times the special game is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game has ended, and after the special game that has been executed after the number of consecutive times reaches a certain number of times, the state is in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state. It is configured so that
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The second identification information is more important than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during the execution of a special game that is executed by being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the first identification information belongs to a predetermined group. It is configured such that the ease of entering a ball into a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of a special game that is executed due to information being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is increased. Ori,
During the execution of a special game that is executed when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal game state, the user enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22). Selection of the variable display time of the first identification information or the second identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state when there is no ball entered and the special game is in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game ends A specific area (for example, specific area C22 ), and when the special game becomes a high probability lottery state and a specific game state after the execution of the special game, a fluctuation display of the first identification information or the second identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. The time selection tendency is configured to be different,
During the execution of a special game that is executed when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal game state, the user enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22). In the case where there is no ball entered and a low probability lottery state and a specific game state are entered after the execution of the special game, the performance tendency in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the first identification information or the first identification information in the normal game state. (2) A ball enters a specific area (for example, specific area C22) during execution of a special game that is executed due to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, and the execution of the special game ends. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance tendency in a high probability lottery state and a specific game state is different when the high probability lottery state and a specific game state are changed later.

The pachinko game machine according to this concept (17) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means that acquires a random number based on the entry of a ball into a starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. identification information display control means for controlling the
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, variable winnings are continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole C20) or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game is executed multiple times that can put the opening (for example, the second big prize opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player;
A game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed in the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S),
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group is lower than the predetermined probability. It also has a high probability lottery state where the probability is high.
As a game state related to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10), the normal gaming state and the specification where it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state are specified. It has a gaming state, and is configured to be controlled so that it can be set to a specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is finished,
It is possible to measure the consecutive number of times the special game is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game has ended, and after the special game that has been executed after the number of consecutive times reaches a certain number of times, the state is in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state. It is configured so that
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
and an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
If a specific game state is entered after the execution of a special game that is executed due to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal gaming state, the display will stop from the start of the fluctuating display of the identification information. It is configured such that the period up to the display is one unit, and after the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times starting from the end of the execution of the special game, the normal game state is established.
As a performance display format, it has at least a performance display format A and a performance display format B that is a performance display format different from the performance display format A,
Configured so that the degree of expectation of being in a high probability lottery state is higher when effect display format B is set in a specific game state than when effect display format A is set in the specific game state. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11t-C First and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 First main game timer, MP11t-C2 Second main game timer MP22t-B Second main game Starting port electric accessory release timer, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34t Special game timer, MP51c Fixed variable number counter MP52c Time saving number counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small winning game timer, MP41t-2 Discharge standby timer A Around the first main game Equipment A10 First main game starting port (first main game starting port A), A11s First main game starting port entry detection device A20 First main game symbol display device, A21g First main game symbol display section A21h First main Game symbol retention display section, B Second main game peripheral device B10 Second main game starting opening, B11s Second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11d Second main game starting opening electric accessory, B20 Second main game symbol display Device B21g 2nd main game symbol display section, B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st Big winning hole electric accessory C20 2nd big winning hole, C21s 2nd big winning hole prize detection device C21d 2nd big winning hole electric accessory, C22 Specific area C23 2nd big winning hole outlet, C23s 2nd big winning hole Discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening ball entry detection device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game starting port H11s Auxiliary game starting port ball entering detection device Device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display section S Sub-control board, SM Performance display control means (sub-main control board)
SM21t Design variable time management timer, SM26c Pre-read performance execution counter SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Consecutive show count counter SM24t Power-on timer, SH10t Variable fixed time timer SS Performance display means (sub-sub control unit), SG Performance display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area, SG12 First hold display area SG13 Second hold display area, SB Sub input button SBs Sub input button input detection device, KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, MT10 Command transmission buffer MP51c-2 Variable continuous counter, MN52c-1 Limited frequency A counter MN52c-2 Limited frequency B counter

Claims (1)

A starting port into which game balls can enter,
A variable prize opening that can be in a closed state or an open state,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
It has at least a fluctuation pattern table A as a table referred to when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information, and a fluctuation pattern table B in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different from the fluctuation pattern table A, It has at least a fluctuation state A that refers to the fluctuation pattern table A and a fluctuation state B that references the fluctuation pattern table B, and the fluctuation state B is a fluctuation state that is transferred from the fluctuation state A,
Fluctuation state A is a time saving state in which the fluctuating display time of identification information is relatively shorter than fluctuating state B, and fluctuating state B is a time saving state in which the fluctuating display time of identification information is relatively longer than fluctuating state A. It is a non-time saving state that becomes time,
It is possible to execute a right-handed instruction performance as a performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the gaming area,
The right-handed instruction performance is configured not to be executed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state ,
This is a performance that can be executed in a time-saving state, and is a performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the gaming area. have,
In the time saving state, the first right-handed hitting instruction performance and the second right-handed hitting instruction performance are configured to be executable at the same time,
In the time saving state, the first right-handed instruction performance is configured to start execution when a predetermined condition is satisfied and to end after a specific period of time, while the second right-handed instruction performance is It is configured to be executable while the right-handed hitting instruction performance is being executed and also to be executable while the first right-handed hitting instruction performance is not being executed,
It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed instruction performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the game area even while a special game is being executed. The execution mode of a right-handed instruction performance that instructs to fire a game ball to the right side of the game ball is configured to change during execution of a special game ,
In the time saving state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and a predetermined period, which is shorter than the specific period, has elapsed since the execution of the first right-handed instruction performance has elapsed, the time saving state changes from the non-time saving state. When the special conditions for switching are satisfied, in the non-time saving state switched by satisfying the special conditions, the first right-handed instruction performance is not executed for a period obtained by subtracting the predetermined period from the specific period. ing
A pachinko game machine characterized by:

Images